Toshiba Air Conditioner RAV SM2244AT7 User Manual

FILE NO. A09-004  
SERVICE MANUAL  
AIR-CONDITIONER  
SPLIT TYPE  
OUTDOOR UNIT  
<DIGITAL INVERTER>  
RAV-SM2244AT8-E RAV-SM2804AT8-E  
RAV-SM2244AT8Z-E RAV-SM2804AT8Z-E  
RAV-SM2244AT8ZG-E RAV-SM2804AT8ZG-E  
RAV-SM2244AT7  
RAV-SM2804AT7  
RAV-SM2244AT7Z RAV-SM2804AT7Z  
RAV-SM2244AT7ZG RAV-SM2804AT7ZG  
R410A  
PRINTED IN JAPAN, Jun, 2009 ToMo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS ........... 45  
7-1. Outdoor Unit Control ........................................................................................ 45  
7-2. Outline of Main Controls .................................................................................. 49  
8. TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................. 55  
8-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting........................................................................... 55  
8-2. Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 57  
9. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS .................................................. 80  
9-1. Calling of Error History .................................................................................... 80  
9-2. Group Control Operation ................................................................................. 80  
9-3. Outdoor Unit...................................................................................................... 82  
10. ADDRESS SETUP.................................................................................... 89  
10-1. Address Setup Procedure................................................................................ 89  
10-2. Address Setup & Group Control...................................................................... 90  
10-3. Remote Controller Wiring................................................................................. 93  
10-4. Address Setup (Manual setting from remote controller)............................... 94  
10-5. Confirmation of Indoor Unit No. Position ....................................................... 95  
11. INSTALLATION MANUAL ........................................................................ 97  
12. REPLACEMENT OF  
THE SERVICE P.C. BOARD (4316V392) MCC-1599 ............................. 110  
13. HOWTO EXCHANGE COMPRESSOR .................................................. 111  
13-1. Exchanging Procedure of Compressor (Outline)......................................... 111  
13-2. Exchange of Compressor .............................................................................. 111  
14. DETACHMENTS ..................................................................................... 112  
14-1. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 112  
15. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST .................................................. 124  
15-1. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 124  
15-2. Inverter Assembly........................................................................................... 126  
15-3. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 128  
15-4. Inverter Assembly........................................................................................... 130  
3 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY CAUTION  
The important contents concerned to the safety are described on the product itself and on this Service Manual.  
Please read this Service Manual after understanding the described items thoroughly in the following contents  
(Indications/Illustrated marks), and keep them.  
[Explanation of indications]  
Indication  
Explanation  
Indicates contents assumed that an imminent danger causing a death or serious injury of  
the repair engineers and the third parties when an incorrect work has been executed.  
DANGER  
Indicates possibilities assumed that a danger causing a death or serious injury of the  
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work  
when an incorrect work has been executed.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Indicates contents assumed that an injury or property damage () may be caused on the  
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work  
when an incorrect work has been executed.  
Property damage : Enlarged damage concerned to property, furniture, and domestic animal/pet  
[Explanation of illustrated marks]  
Mark  
Explanation  
Indicates prohibited items (Forbidden items to do)  
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete prohibited contents.  
Indicates mandatory items (Compulsory items to do)  
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete mandatory contents.  
Indicates cautions (Including danger/warning)  
The sentences or illustration near or in an illustrated mark describe the concrete cautious contents.  
[Confirmation of warning label on the main unit]  
Confirm that labels are indicated on the specified positions  
(Refer to the Parts disassembly diagram (Outdoor unit).)  
If removing the label during parts replace, stick it as the original.  
DANGER  
Turn “OFF” the breaker before removing the front panel and cabinet, otherwise an electric  
shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
During operation, a high voltage with 400V or higher of circuit () at secondary circuit of the  
high-voltage transformer is applied.  
If touching a high voltage with the naked hands or body, an electric shock is caused even if using an  
electric insulator.  
Turn off breaker.  
• Attach a plate indicating “WORKING” or others on the breaker so that you don’t accidentally turn  
on the breaker during work.  
: For details, refer to the electric wiring diagram.  
When removing the front panel or cabinet, execute short-circuit and discharge between  
high-voltage capacitor terminals.  
If discharge is not executed, an electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
Execute discharge  
between terminals. After turning off the breaker, high voltage also keeps to apply to the high-voltage capacitor.  
Do not turn on the breaker under condition that the front panel and cabinet are removed.  
An electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
Prohibition  
– 4 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
Before troubleshooting or repair work, check the earth wire is connected to the earth  
terminals of the main unit, otherwise an electric shock is caused when a leak occurs.  
If the earth wire is not correctly connected, contact an electric engineer for rework.  
Check earth wires.  
Prohibition of modification.  
Use specified parts.  
Do not modify the products.  
Do not also disassemble or modify the parts. It may cause a fire, electric shock or injury.  
For spare parts, use those specified ().  
If unspecified parts are used, a fire or electric shock may be caused.  
: For details, refer to the parts list.  
Before troubleshooting or repair work, do not bring a third party (a child, etc.) except  
the repair engineers close to the equipment.  
It causes an injury with tools or disassembled parts.  
Do not bring a child  
close to the equipment.  
Please inform the users so that the third party (a child, etc.) does not approach the equipment.  
Connect the cut-off lead wires with crimp contact, etc, put the closed end side  
upward and then apply a water-cut method, otherwise a leak or production of fire is  
caused at the users’ side.  
Insulating measures  
When repairing the refrigerating cycle, take the following measures.  
1) Be attentive to fire around the cycle. When using a gas stove, etc, be sure to put out fire  
before work; otherwise the oil mixed with refrigerant gas may catch fire.  
2) Do not use a welder in the closed room.  
No fire  
When using it without ventilation, carbon monoxide poisoning may be caused.  
3) Do not bring inflammables close to the refrigerant cycle, otherwise fire of the welder may  
catch the inflammables.  
Check the used refrigerant name and use tools and materials of the parts which  
match with it.  
For the products which use R410A refrigerant, the refrigerant name is indicated at a  
position on the outdoor unit where is easy to see. To prevent miss-charging, the route of the  
service port is changed from one of the former R22.  
For an air conditioner which uses R410A, never use other refrigerant than R410A.  
For an air conditioner which uses other refrigerant (R22, etc.), never use R410A.  
If different types of refrigerant are mixed, abnormal high pressure generates in the  
refrigerating cycle and an injury due to breakage may be caused.  
Do not charge refrigerant additionally.  
If charging refrigerant additionally when refrigerant gas leaks, the refrigerant composition in  
the refrigerating cycle changes resulted in change of air conditioner characteristics or  
refrigerant over the specified standard amount is charged and an abnormal high pressure is  
applied to the inside of the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of breakage or injury.  
Therefore if the refrigerant gas leaks, recover the refrigerant in the air conditioner, execute  
vacuuming, and then newly recharge the specified amount of liquid refrigerant.  
In this time, never charge the refrigerant over the specified amount.  
Refrigerant  
When recharging the refrigerant in the refrigerating cycle, do not mix the refrigerant  
or air other than R410A into the specified refrigerant.  
If air or others is mixed with the refrigerant, abnormal high pressure generates in the  
refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of injury due to breakage.  
After installation work, check the refrigerant gas does not leak.  
If the refrigerant gas leaks in the room, poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire  
such as fan heater, stove or cocking stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.  
Never recover the refrigerant into the outdoor unit.  
When the equipment is moved or repaired, be sure to recover the refrigerant with  
recovering device. The refrigerant cannot be recovered in the outdoor unit; otherwise a  
serious accident such as breakage or injury is caused.  
After repair work, surely assemble the disassembled parts, and connect and lead the  
removed wires as before. Perform the work so that the cabinet or panel does not  
catch the inner wires.  
If incorrect assembly or incorrect wire connection was done, a disaster such as a leak or  
fire is caused at user’s side.  
Assembly/Cabling  
– 5 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
After the work has finished, be sure to use an insulation tester set (500V Megger) to  
check the resistance is 2Mor more between the charge section and the non-charge  
metal section (Earth position).  
Insulator check  
Ventilation  
If the resistance value is low, a disaster such as a leak or electric shock is caused at user’s side.  
When the refrigerant gas leaks during work, execute ventilation.  
If the refrigerant gas touches to a fire, poisonous gas generates.  
A case of leakage of the refrigerant and the closed room full with gas is dangerous because  
a shortage of oxygen occurs. Be sure to execute ventilation.  
When checking the circuit inevitably under condition of the power-ON, use rubber  
gloves and others not to touch to the charging section.  
If touching to the charging section, an electric shock may be caused.  
Be attentive to  
electric shock  
When the refrigerant gas leaks, find up the leaked position and repair it surely.  
If the leaked position cannot be found up and the repair work is interrupted, pump-down and  
tighten the service valve, otherwise the refrigerant gas may leak into the room.  
The poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire such as fan heater, stove or cocking  
stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.  
When installing equipment which includes a large amount of charged refrigerant such  
as a multi air conditioner in a sub-room, it is necessary that the density does not the  
limit even if the refrigerant leaks.  
Compulsion  
If the refrigerant leaks and exceeds the limit density, an accident of shortage of oxygen is caused.  
For the installation/moving/reinstallation work, follow to the Installation Manual.  
If an incorrect installation is done, a trouble of the refrigerating cycle, water leak, electric  
shock or fire is caused.  
After repair work has finished, check there is no trouble.  
If check is not executed, a fire, electric shock or injury may be caused.  
For a check, turn off the power breaker.  
Check after repair  
After repair work (installation of front panel and cabinet) has finished, execute a test  
run to check there is no generation of smoke or abnormal sound.  
If check is not executed, a fire or an electric shock is caused.  
Before test run, install the front panel and cabinet.  
Check the following items after reinstallation.  
Check after reinstallation  
1) The earth wire is correctly connected.  
2) The power cord is not caught in the product.  
3) There is no inclination or unsteadiness and the installation is stable.  
If check is not executed, a fire, an electric shock or an injury is caused.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to put on the gloves () and a long sleeved shirt:  
otherwise an injury may be caused with the parts, etc.  
() Heavy gloves such as work gloves  
Put on gloves  
Cooling check  
When the power was turned on, start to work after the equipment has been  
sufficiently cooled.  
As temperature of the compressor pipes and others became high due to cooling/heating  
operation, a burn may be caused.  
– 6 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• New Refrigerant (R410A)  
This air conditioner adopts a new HFC type refrigerant (R410A) which does not deplete the ozone layer.  
1. Safety Caution Concerned to New Refrigerant  
The pressure of R410A is high 1.6 times of that of the former refrigerant (R22).  
Accompanied with change of refrigerant, the refrigerating oil has been also changed.  
Therefore, be sure that water, dust, the former refrigerant or the former refrigerating oil is not mixed into the  
refrigerating cycle of the air conditioner with new refrigerant during installation work or service work.  
If an incorrect work or incorrect service is performed, there is a possibility to cause a serious accident.  
Use the tools and materials exclusive to R410A to purpose a safe work.  
2. Cautions on Installation/Service  
1) Do not mix the other refrigerant or refrigerating oil.  
For the tools exclusive to R410A, shapes of all the joints including the service port differ from those of  
the former refrigerant in order to prevent mixture of them.  
2) As the use pressure of the new refrigerant is high, use material thickness of the pipe and tools which are  
specified for R410A.  
3) In the installation time, use clean pipe materials and work with great attention so that water and others do  
not mix in because pipes are affected by impurities such as water, oxide scales, oil, etc.  
Use the clean pipes.  
Be sure to brazing with flowing nitrogen gas. (Never use gas other than nitrogen gas.)  
4) For the earth protection, use a vacuum pump for air purge.  
5) R410A refrigerant is azeotropic mixture type refrigerant.  
Therefore use liquid type to charge the refrigerant. (If using gas for charging, composition of the  
refrigerant changes and then characteristics of the air conditioner change.)  
3. Pipe Materials  
For the refrigerant pipes, copper pipe and joints are mainly used.  
It is necessary to select the most appropriate pipes to conform to the standard.  
Use clean material in which impurities adhere inside of pipe or joint to a minimum.  
1) Copper pipe  
<Piping>  
The pipe thickness, flare finishing size, flare nut and others differ according to a refrigerant type.  
When using a long copper pipe for R410A, it is recommended to select “Copper or copper-base pipe without  
seam” and one with bonded oil amount 40mg/10m or less.  
Also do not use crushed, deformed, discolored (especially inside) pipes.  
(Impurities cause clogging of expansion valves and capillary tubes.)  
<Flare nut>  
Use the flare nuts which are attached to the air conditioner unit.  
2) Joint  
The flare joint and socket joint are used for joints of the copper pipe.  
The joints are rarely used for installation of the air conditioner. However clear impurities when using them.  
– 7 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Tools  
1. Required Tools for R410A  
Mixing of different types of oil may cause a trouble such as generation of sludge, clogging of capillary,  
etc. Accordingly, the tools to be used are classified into the following three types.  
1) Tools exclusive for R410A (Those which cannot be used for conventional refrigerant (R22))  
2) Tools exclusive for R410A, but can be also used for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
3) Tools commonly used for R410A and for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
The table below shows the tools exclusive for R410A and their interchangeability.  
Tools exclusive for R410A (The following tools for R410A are required.)  
Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability  
R410A  
air conditioner installation  
Conventional air  
conditioner installation  
No.  
Used tool  
Usage  
Existence of  
new equipment  
for R410A  
Whether conven-  
tional equipment  
can be used  
Whether conventional  
equipment can be used  
Flare tool  
Pipe flaring  
Ye s  
Ye s  
Ye s  
(Note)  
(Note)  
N o  
Ye s  
(Note)  
No  

Copper pipe gauge for  
adjusting projection margin flare tool  
Flaring by conventional  
Torque wrench  
Tightening of flare nut  
ƒ
Gauge manifold  
Charge hose  
Evacuating, refrigerant  
charge, run check, etc.  
Ye s  
N o  
No  
Vacuum pump adapter  
Vacuum evacuating  
Refrigerant charge  
Ye s  
Ye s  
N o  
Ye s  
Ye s  
Electronic balance for  
refrigerant charging  
Ye s  
Refrigerant cylinder  
Leakage detector  
Refrigerant charge  
Gas leakage check  
Ye s  
Ye s  
N o  
N o  
No  
ˆ
Ye s  
(Note) When flaring is carried out for R410A using the conventional flare tools, adjustment of projection  
margin is necessary. For this adjustment, a copper pipe gauge, etc. are necessary.  
General tools (Conventional tools can be used.)  
In addition to the above exclusive tools, the following equipments which serve also for R22 are necessary  
as the general tools.  
1) Vacuum pump. Use vacuum pump by attaching vacuum pump adapter.  
2) Torque wrench  
3) Pipe cutter  
4) Reamer  
8) Spanner or Monkey wrench  
9) Hole core drill  
10) Hexagon wrench (Opposite side 4mm)  
11) Tape measure  
5) Pipe bender  
6) Level vial  
12) Metal saw  
7) Screwdriver (+, –)  
Also prepare the following equipments for other installation method and run check.  
1) Clamp meter  
2) Thermometer  
3) Insulation resistance tester (Megger)  
4) Electroscope  
– 8 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Combination Pattern (Indoor Unit / Outdoor Unit)  
<RAV-SM2244AT series>  
Simultaneous twin  
4-way air discharge  
cassette type  
Concealed  
duct type  
Ceiling type  
RAV-SM1104UT-E  
RAV-SM1104UT-E  
RAV-SM1102BT-E  
RAV-SM1102BT-E  
RAV-SM1102CT-E  
RAV-SM1102CT-E  
Simultaneous triple  
4-way air discharge  
cassette type  
Concealed  
duct type  
High wall type  
(2 series)  
Ceiling type  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
Simultaneous double twin  
4-way air discharge  
cassette type  
Compact 4-way  
Concealed  
duct type  
High wall type  
(2 series)  
Slim duct type  
Ceiling type  
cassette (600×600) type  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM564UT-E  
RAV-SM564UT-E  
RAV-SM564UT-E  
RAV-SM564UT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM562BT-E  
RAV-SM562BT-E  
RAV-SM562BT-E  
RAV-SM562BT-E  
RAV-SM562CT-E  
RAV-SM562CT-E  
RAV-SM562CT-E  
RAV-SM562CT-E  
RAV-SM562KRT-E  
RAV-SM562KRT-E  
RAV-SM562KRT-E  
RAV-SM562KRT-E  
<RAV-SM2804AT series>  
Simultaneous twin  
4-way air discharge  
cassette type  
Concealed  
duct type  
Ceiling type  
RAV-SM1404UT-E  
RAV-SM1404UT-E  
RAV-SM1402BT-E  
RAV-SM1402BT-E  
RAV-SM1402CT-E  
RAV-SM1402CT-E  
Simultaneous triple  
4-way air discharge  
cassette type  
Concealed  
duct type  
High wall type  
(2 series)  
Ceiling type  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
Simultaneous double twin  
4-way air discharge  
cassette type  
Concealed  
duct type  
High wall type  
(2 series)  
Ceiling type  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802BT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802CT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
RAV-SM802KRT-E  
– 9 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RAV-SM2244AT series  
Branch kit  
Slimultaneous twin  
SM110  
SM80  
SM56  
SM110  
RBC-TWP101E  
Simultaneous triple  
SM80  
SM56  
SM80  
SM56  
RBC-TRP100E  
Simultaneous double twin  
SM56  
RBC-DTWP101E  
RAV-SM2804AT series  
Branch kit  
Slimultaneous twin  
SM140  
SM80  
SM80  
SM140  
RBC-TWP101E  
Simultaneous triple  
SM80  
SM80  
SM80  
SM80  
RBC-TRP100E  
Simultaneous double twin  
SM80  
RBC-DTWP101E  
– 10 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. SPECIFICATIONS  
1-1. Indoor Unit  
1-1-1. 4-Way CassetteType  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
1104UT-E  
1104UT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
1404UT-E  
1404UT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
1104UT-E  
1104UT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
1404UT-E  
1404UT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Model  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 10.09 – 9.24 13.24 – 12.12  
10.09  
6.24  
94  
13.24  
8.19  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.24  
94  
8.19  
94  
EER  
3.21  
A
2.81  
C
3.21  
2.81  
Energy efficiency class  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
9.41 – 8.61 12.09 – 11.07  
9.41  
5.82  
94  
12.09  
7.48  
94  
characteristics  
5.82  
94  
7.48  
94  
Heating Power factor  
COP  
3.85  
A
3.61  
A
3.85  
3.61  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
22  
18  
22  
Fan  
Turbo fan  
Turbo fan  
Turbo fan  
Turbo fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
(m³/min.) 33.5/24.0/19.5 35.0/24.0/20.5 33.5/24.0/19.5 35.0/24.0/20.5  
Motor  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
68  
72  
68  
72  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
43 / 38 / 33  
58 / 53 / 48  
44 / 38 / 34  
59 / 53 / 49  
43 / 38 / 33  
58 / 53 / 48  
44 / 38 / 34  
59 / 53 / 49  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
Outdoor unit – Pipe branch  
Pipe branch – Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
(mm)  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 11 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-2. DuctType  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
1102BT-E  
1102BT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
1402BT-E  
1402BT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
1102BT-E  
1102BT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
14002BT-E  
1402BT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Model  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
characteristics  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
7.92  
Heating Power factor  
94  
94  
COP  
3.50  
3.41  
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
B
18  
B
22  
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
22  
Fan  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
(m³/min.) 27.0/23.0/18.9 33.0/28.0/23.1 27.0/23.0/18.9 33.0/28.0/23.1  
Motor  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
120  
120  
120  
120  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
42 / 39 / 36  
57 / 54 / 51  
44 / 41 / 38  
59 / 56 / 53  
42 / 39 / 36  
57 / 54 / 51  
44 / 41 / 38  
59 / 56 / 53  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
Outdoor unit – Pipe branch  
Pipe branch – Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
(mm)  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 12 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-3. CeilingType  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
1102CT-E  
1102CT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
1402CT-E  
1402CT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
1102CT-E  
1102CT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
1402CT-E  
1402CT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Model  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
characteristics  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
7.92  
Heating Power factor  
94  
94  
COP  
3.50  
3.41  
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
B
18  
B
22  
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
22  
Fan  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
(m³/min.) 27.5/24.0/21.2 30.0/26.0/23.1 27.5/24.0/21.2 30.0/26.0/23.1  
Motor  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
120  
120  
120  
120  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
41 / 38 / 35  
56 / 53 / 50  
43 / 40 / 37  
58 / 55 / 52  
41 / 38 / 35  
56 / 53 / 50  
43 / 40 / 37  
58 / 55 / 52  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
Outdoor unit – Pipe branch  
Pipe branch – Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
(mm)  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 13 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-4. 4-Way CassetteType  
<Triple type>  
Indoor unit 1  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Indoor unit 2  
Model  
Indoor unit 3  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
Power supply  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
characteristics  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
94  
7.92  
94  
Heating Power factor  
COP  
3.50  
B
3.41  
B
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
22  
18  
22  
Fan  
Turbo fan  
Turbo fan  
Turbo fan  
Turbo fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
(m³/min.) 20.5/16.0/13.5 20.5/16.0/13.5 20.5/16.0/13.5 20.5/16.0/13.5  
Motor  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
20  
20  
20  
20  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
Outdoor unit – Pipe branch  
Pipe branch – Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
(mm)  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 14 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-5. DuctType  
<Triple type>  
Indoor unit 1  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Indoor unit 2  
Indoor unit 3  
Outdoor unit  
Model  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
characteristics  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
7.92  
Heating Power factor  
94  
94  
COP  
3.50  
3.41  
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
B
18  
B
22  
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
22  
Fan  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
(m³/min.) 19.0/16.2/13.3 19.0/16.2/13.3 19.0/16.2/13.3 19.0/16.2/13.3  
Motor  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
120  
120  
120  
120  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
40 / 37 / 34  
55 / 52 / 49  
40 / 37 / 34  
55 / 52 / 49  
40 / 37 / 34  
55 / 52 / 49  
40 / 37 / 34  
55 / 52 / 49  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
Outdoor unit – Pipe branch  
Pipe branch – Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
(mm)  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 15 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-6. CeilingType  
<Triple type>  
Indoor unit 1  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Indoor unit 2  
Indoor unit 3  
Outdoor unit  
Model  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
characteristics  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
7.92  
Heating Power factor  
94  
94  
COP  
3.50  
3.41  
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
B
18  
B
22  
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
22  
Fan  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
(m³/min.) 18.5/16.7/14.6 18.5/16.7/14.6 18.5/16.7/14.6 18.5/16.7/14.6  
Motor  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
60  
60  
60  
60  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
38 / 36 / 33  
53 / 51 / 48  
38 / 36 / 33  
53 / 51 / 48  
38 / 36 / 33  
53 / 51 / 48  
38 / 36 / 33  
53 / 51 / 48  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
Outdoor unit – Pipe branch  
Pipe branch – Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
(mm)  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 16 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-7. High WallType  
<Triple type>  
Indoor unit 1  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Indoor unit 2  
Indoor unit 3  
Outdoor unit  
Model  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
characteristics  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
94  
7.92  
94  
Heating Power factor  
COP  
3.50  
B
3.41  
B
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
22  
18  
22  
Fan  
Cross flow fan Cross flow fan Cross flow fan Cross flow fan  
(m³/min.) 18.5/14.6/12.2 18.5/14.6/12.2 18.5/14.6/12.2 18.5/14.6/12.2  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
45 / 41 / 36  
60 / 56 / 51  
45 / 41 / 36  
60 / 56 / 51  
45 / 41 / 36  
60 / 56 / 51  
45 / 41 / 36  
60 / 56 / 51  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
Outdoor unit – Pipe branch  
Pipe branch – Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
(mm)  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 17 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-8. 4-Way CassetteType  
<Double twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
564UT-E  
564UT-E  
564UT-E  
564UT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
564UT-E  
564UT-E  
564UT-E  
564UT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
804UT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Model  
Indoor unit 3  
Indoor unit 4  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
characteristics  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
94  
7.92  
94  
Heating Power factor  
COP  
3.50  
B
3.41  
B
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
22  
18  
22  
Fan  
Turbo fan  
Turbo fan  
Turbo fan  
Turbo fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
(m³/min.) 17.5/14.5/13.0 20.5/16.0/13.5 17.5/14.5/13.0 20.5/16.0/13.5  
Motor  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
14  
20  
14  
20  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
32 / 29 / 28  
47 / 44 / 43  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
32 / 29 / 28  
47 / 44 / 43  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
Outdoor unit – Pipe branch  
Pipe branch – Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
(mm)  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Connecting pipe  
(mm)  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 18 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-9. Compact 4-Way Cassette (600 × 600)Type  
<Double twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM2244AT8-E  
20.0  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
RAV-SM2244AT7  
20.0  
Model  
Indoor unit 3  
Indoor unit 4  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
22.4  
22.4  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
(A)  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
11.51 – 10.54  
11.51  
(kW)  
7.12  
7.12  
(%)  
94  
94  
EER  
2.81  
2.81  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
C
10.34 – 9.47  
6.40  
10.34  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
Heating Power factor  
94  
94  
COP  
3.50  
3.50  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
B
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
18  
Fan  
Turbo fan  
13.3 / 11.2 / 9.1  
60  
Turbo fan  
13.3 / 11.2 / 9.1  
60  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Motor  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
43 / 39 / 34  
58 / 54 / 49  
43 / 39 / 34  
58 / 54 / 49  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
70  
7.5  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
30  
30  
(m)  
30  
30  
Propeller fan  
133  
Propeller fan  
133  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
100 + 100  
28.6  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit –  
First pipe branch  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
12.7  
12.7  
15.9  
15.9  
First pipe branch –  
Second pipe branch  
Connecting pipe  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
9.5  
9.5  
12.7  
12.7  
Second pipe branch –  
Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
6.4  
6.4  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
: IEC standard  
– 19 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-10. Slim DuctType  
<Double twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM2244AT8-E  
20.0  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM564SDT-E  
RAV-SM2244AT7  
20.0  
Model  
Indoor unit 3  
Indoor unit 4  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
22.4  
22.4  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
(A)  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
11.51 – 10.54  
11.51  
(kW)  
7.12  
7.12  
(%)  
94  
94  
EER  
2.81  
2.81  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
C
10.34 – 9.47  
6.40  
10.34  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
Heating Power factor  
94  
94  
COP  
3.50  
3.50  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
B
(A)  
18  
18  
Fan  
Centrifugal fan  
13.0 / 11.3 / 9.7  
60  
Centrifugal fan  
13.0 / 11.3 / 9.7  
60  
Standard air flow  
Motor  
H/M/L  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Fan unit  
Standard (at shipment)  
(Pa)  
10  
10  
Extermal  
static pressure  
Set up for tap exchange  
(Pa)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
10 / 20 / 35 / 50  
45 / 40 / 36  
33 / 31 / 28  
60 / 55 / 51  
48 / 46 / 43  
10 / 20 / 35 / 50  
45 / 40 / 36  
33 / 31 / 28  
60 / 55 / 51  
48 / 46 / 43  
Under air inlet  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Back air inlet  
Under air inlet  
Back air inlet  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
70  
7.5  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Fan unit  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
30  
30  
(m)  
30  
30  
Propeller fan  
133  
Propeller fan  
133  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
100 + 100  
28.6  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
Outdoor unit –  
First pipe branch  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
15.9  
12.7 12.7  
15.9  
Gas side  
First pipe branch –  
Second pipe branch  
Connecting pipe  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
(mm)  
12.7  
12.7  
Second pipe branch –  
Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
6.4  
6.4  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
: IEC standard  
– 20 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-11. DuctType  
<Double twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
562BT-E  
562BT-E  
562BT-E  
562BT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
562BT-E  
562BT-E  
562BT-E  
562BT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
802BT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Indoor unit 2  
Indoor unit 3  
Indoor unit 4  
Outdoor unit  
Model  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
7.92  
Heating Power factor  
94  
94  
COP  
3.50  
3.41  
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
B
18  
B
22  
(A)  
18  
22  
Fan  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.) 13.0/11.9/9.8 19.0/16.2/13.3 13.0/11.9/9.8 19.0/16.2/13.3  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
120  
120  
120  
120  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
40 / 37 / 33  
55 / 52 / 48  
40 / 37 / 34  
55 / 52 / 49  
40 / 37 / 33  
55 / 52 / 48  
40 / 37 / 34  
55 / 52 / 49  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit –  
First pipe branch  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
First pipe branch –  
Second pipe branch  
Connecting pipe  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
12.7  
15.9  
12.7  
15.9  
Second pipe branch –  
Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
6.4  
9.5  
6.4  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 21 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-12. CeilingType  
<Double twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
562CT-E  
562CT-E  
562CT-E  
562CT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
562CT-E  
562CT-E  
562CT-E  
562CT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
802CT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Indoor unit 2  
Indoor unit 3  
Indoor unit 4  
Outdoor unit  
Model  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
7.92  
Heating Power factor  
94  
94  
COP  
3.50  
3.41  
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
B
18  
B
22  
(A)  
18  
22  
Fan  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Centrifugal  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.) 13.0/11.2/10.0 18.5/16.7/14.6 13.0/11.2/10.0 18.5/16.7/14.6  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
60  
60  
60  
60  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
36 / 33 / 30  
51 / 48 / 45  
38 / 36 / 33  
53 / 51 / 48  
36 / 33 / 30  
51 / 48 / 45  
38 / 36 / 33  
53 / 51 / 48  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit –  
First pipe branch  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
First pipe branch –  
Second pipe branch  
Connecting pipe  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
12.7  
15.9  
12.7  
15.9  
Second pipe branch –  
Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
6.4  
9.5  
6.4  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 22 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-12. High WallType  
<Double twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
RAV-SM  
(kW)  
562KRT-E  
562KRT-E  
562KRT-E  
562KRT-E  
2244AT8-E  
20.0  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
2804AT8-E  
23.0  
562KRT-E  
562KRT-E  
562KRT-E  
562KRT-E  
2244AT7  
20.0  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
802KRT-E  
2804AT7  
23.0  
Model  
Indoor unit 3  
Indoor unit 4  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
22.4  
27.0  
22.4  
27.0  
3 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
3 phase 380V 60Hz  
Indoor unit  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Cooling Power factor  
(A) 11.51 – 10.54 15.44 – 14.13  
11.51  
7.12  
94  
15.44  
9.55  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
7.12  
94  
9.55  
94  
EER  
2.81  
C
2.41  
E
2.81  
2.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A) 10.34 – 9.47 12.80 – 11.72  
10.34  
6.40  
94  
12.80  
7.92  
94  
(kW)  
(%)  
6.40  
94  
7.92  
94  
Heating Power factor  
COP  
3.50  
B
3.41  
B
3.50  
3.41  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Maximum current  
(A)  
18  
22  
18  
22  
Fan  
Cross flow fan Cross flow fan Cross flow fan Cross flow fan  
(m³/min.) 14.0/12.5/10.7 18.5/14.6/12.2 14.0/12.5/10.7 18.5/14.6/12.2  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(W)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
39 / 36 / 33  
54 / 51 / 48  
45 / 41 / 36  
60 / 56 / 51  
39 / 36 / 33  
54 / 51 / 48  
45 / 41 / 36  
60 / 56 / 51  
Max. total length  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
70  
7.5  
30  
30  
Min. length  
Height difference  
Fan  
(m)  
Outer dimension  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor high  
(m)  
(m)  
Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow high  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
133  
100 + 100  
28.6  
Gas side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit –  
First pipe branch  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
15.9  
First pipe branch –  
Second pipe branch  
Connecting pipe  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Second pipe branch –  
Indoor unit  
Liquid side  
6.4  
9.5  
6.4  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling / Heating  
Cooling / Heating  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
: IEC standard  
– 23 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2. Outdoor Unit  
Model  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SM 2244AT8-E 2804AT8-E  
2244AT7  
2804AT7  
1 phase 380 – 415V 50Hz  
1 phase 380V 60Hz  
Power supply  
(Power exclusive to outdoor is required.)  
Type  
Motor  
Pole  
Hermetic compressor Hermetic compressor  
Compressor  
(kW)  
(kg)  
3.75  
4
3.75  
4
3.75  
4
3.75  
4
Refrigerant charged  
Refrigerant control  
5.9  
5.9  
5.9  
5.9  
Pulse motor valve  
Pulse motor valve  
Max. total length  
Min. length  
(m)  
(m)  
70  
7.5  
70  
7.5  
70  
7.5  
70  
7.5  
Pipe  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
Height difference  
Height  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
1540  
900  
320  
1540  
900  
320  
1540  
900  
320  
1540  
900  
320  
Outer dimension Width  
Depth  
Silky shade  
(Muncel 1Y8.5/0.5)  
Silky shade  
(Muncel 1Y8.5/0.5)  
Appearance  
Total weight  
Heat exchanger  
Fan  
(kg)  
134  
Finned tube  
Propeller fan  
134  
134  
Finned tube  
Propeller fan  
134  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
133  
133  
100 + 100  
19.1  
133  
133  
100 + 100  
19.1  
100 + 100  
19.1  
100 + 100  
19.1  
Gas side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(°C)  
Connecting pipe  
(Outdoor unit side)  
Liquid side  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
12.7  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
56 / 57  
72 / 74  
57 / 58  
74 / 75  
Outside air temperature, Cooling  
Outside air temperature, Heating  
46 to –15°C  
15 to –20°C  
46 to –15°C  
15 to –20°C  
(°C)  
– 24 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3. Operation Characteristic Curve  
• Operation characteristic curve <Digital Inverter>  
RAV-SM2244AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E, RAV-SM2804AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
18  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
SM280  
SM280  
SM224  
SM224  
6
6
4
4
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C  
Outdoor : DB35˚C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
400V, 50Hz (3 phase)  
Indoor : DB20˚C  
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
400V, 50Hz (3 phase)  
2
2
0
0
0
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Compressor speed (rps)  
RAV-SM2244AT7 (Z) (ZG), RAV-SM2804AT7 (Z) (ZG)  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
18  
16  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
SM280  
SM280  
14  
12  
10  
8
SM224  
SM224  
6
6
4
4
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C  
Outdoor : DB35˚C  
Air flow : High  
Indoor : DB20˚C  
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
380V, 60Hz (3 phase)  
2
2
Pipe length : 7.5m  
380V, 60Hz (3 phase)  
0
0
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Compressor speed (rps)  
– 25 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Capacity variation ratio according to temperature  
RAV-SM2244AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E, RAV-SM2804AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E  
RAV-SM2244AT7 (Z) (ZG), RAV-SM2804AT7 (Z) (ZG)  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
105  
100  
95  
120  
110  
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
90  
85  
80  
75  
70  
65  
60  
55  
50  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Indoor : DB20˚C  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
-20 -18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2  
0
2
4
6
8 10  
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46  
Outdoor temp. (˚C)  
Outdoor temp. (˚C)  
– 26 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. CONSTRUCTION VIEWS (EXTERNAL VIEWS)  
2-1. Outdoor Unit  
– 27 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RBC-DTWP101E (Simultaneous DoubleTwin)  
<Branch pipe>  
<Joint pipe>  
Inner diameter  
Ø C  
Outer diameter  
Ø25.4  
Inner  
diameter  
Ø D  
Inner  
diameter  
Ø D  
A
Inner diameter  
Ø28.6  
1 pc.  
Model  
A
B
C
D
Q’ty  
74  
42  
43  
35  
34  
36  
37  
23  
23  
18  
14  
14  
25.4  
15.9  
15.9  
12.7  
9.5  
15.9  
15.9  
12.7  
9.5  
1
2
2
1
2
2
Gas side  
RBC-DTWP101E  
Liquid side  
9.5  
9.5  
6.4  
– 28 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RBC-TRP100E (SimultaneousTriple)  
<Gas side>  
Header assembly  
300  
Inner diameter  
Ø15.9  
100  
80  
80  
1 pc.  
<Liquid side>  
Branch pipe assembly  
100  
35  
80  
80  
Inner diameter  
Ø9.52  
1 pc.  
Insulator  
Gas side socket  
Liquid side socket  
Outer diameter  
Ø25.4  
Ø15.9  
Ø12.7  
Ø9.5  
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
Ø15.9  
Ø25.4  
Ø12.7  
(External  
diameter)  
(External  
diameter)  
(External  
diameter)  
(External  
diameter)  
Inner  
diameter  
Ø28.6  
3 pcs.  
1 pc.  
1 pc.  
3 pcs.  
1 pc.  
– 29 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RBC-TWP101E (SimultaneousTwin)  
<Branch pipe>  
<Joint pipe>  
Inner diameter  
Ø C  
Outer diameter  
Ø25.4  
Inner  
diameter  
Ø D  
Inner  
diameter  
Ø D  
A
Inner diameter  
Ø28.6  
1 pc.  
Model  
A
B
C
D
Q’ty  
1
Gas side  
Liquid side  
74  
35  
37  
18  
25.4  
12.7  
15.9  
9.5  
RBC-TWP101E  
1
– 30 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. OUTDOOR UNIT REFRIGERANTING CYCLE DIAGRAM  
RAV-SM2244AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E, RAV-SM2804AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E  
RAV-SM2244AT7 (Z) (ZG), RAV-SM2804AT7 (Z) (ZG)  
Solenoid valve  
Check joint  
High-pressure side  
TO sensor  
P
Pressure switch  
Check  
valve  
Muffler  
Ø45 × 230 L  
TL sensor  
4-way  
valve  
Check joint  
Low-pressure side  
TD sensor  
TE sensor  
P
Pressure  
sensor  
Distributor  
Heat exchanger  
Ø8, 2 rows, 60 stages + Ø9.5, 1 row, 60 stages  
13-13 pass + under cool pass  
TS sensor  
PMV 1  
Liquid tank  
Ø45 × 420 L  
Accumulator  
(8500cc) Ø161.6  
Packed valve  
Ø12.7  
PMV 2  
Compressor  
DA550A3F-11M  
: Cooling  
: Heating  
: Strainer  
Ball valve  
Ø19.1  
– 31 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Systematic diagram of refrigerating cycle  
RAV-SM2244 series  
Pressure  
(MPa) (kg/cm²g) Discharge Suction  
Pd Ps  
3.14 0.88 32.0  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor  
frequency  
exchanger  
exchanger  
fan  
(rps)  
Pd  
Ps  
(TD)  
84  
(TS)  
14  
17  
7
(TC)  
10  
16  
5
(TE)  
37  
46  
0
Indoor  
27/19  
32/24  
18/15.5  
20/–  
Outdoor  
35/–  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
9.0  
64  
62  
36  
66  
36  
75  
HIGH  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
3.54 1.14 36.1 11.6  
88  
43/–  
1.65 0.65 16.8  
2.60 0.67 26.5  
6.6  
6.8  
41  
–15/–  
7/6  
Standard  
73  
2
42  
52  
34  
2
Heating Overload  
Low load  
3.24 1.08 33.1 11.0  
2.05 0.31 20.9 3.2  
77  
14  
–12  
13  
–11  
30/–  
24/18  
–10/(70%)  
76  
15/–  
This compressor has a 4-pole motor.  
The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp meter is twice the compressor  
revolution number (rps).  
This data is cycle data obtained by combining a four-way ceiling cassette simultaneous twin at a target pipe  
length. Data will change depending on the mounted pipe length or combination with the indoor unit.  
RAV-SM2804 series  
Pressure  
(MPa) (kg/cm²g) Discharge Suction  
Pd Ps  
3.15 0.79 32.1  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor  
frequency  
exchanger  
exchanger  
fan  
(rps)  
Pd  
Ps  
(TD)  
87  
(TS)  
11  
18  
6
(TC)  
9
(TE)  
41  
48  
0
Indoor  
27/19  
32/24  
18/15.5  
20/–  
Outdoor  
35/–  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
8.1  
80  
64  
36  
80  
36  
96  
HIGH  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
3.62 1.12 36.9 11.4  
89  
16  
5
43/–  
1.66 0.64 16.9  
2.85 0.63 29.1  
6.5  
6.4  
42  
–15/–  
7/6  
Standard  
80  
1
47  
53  
33  
2
Heating Overload  
Low load  
3.26 1.06 33.3 10.8  
2.05 0.29 20.9 3.0  
78  
14  
–13  
12  
–12  
30/–  
24/18  
–10/(70%)  
81  
15/–  
This compressor has a 4-pole motor.  
The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp meter is twice the compressor  
revolution number (rps).  
This data is cycle data obtained by combining a four-way ceiling cassette simultaneous twin at a target pipe  
length. Data will change depending on the mounted pipe length or combination with the indoor unit.  
– 32 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. WIRING DIAGRAM  
4-1. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM2244AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E, RAV-SM2804AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E  
RAV-SM2244AT7 (Z) (ZG), RAV-SM2804AT7 (Z) (ZG)  
Compressor  
IPDU board  
MCC-1596  
Noise Filter  
P.C. board  
MCC-1600  
Fan IPDU board  
MCC-1597  
Interface (CDB)  
P.C. board  
MCC-1436  
MCC-1599  
– 33 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. SPECIFICATIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS  
5-1. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM2244AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E, RAV-SM2804AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E  
RAV-SM2244AT7 (Z) (ZG), RAV-SM2804AT7 (Z) (ZG)  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Type  
DA550A3F-11M  
ICF-280-A100-1  
STF-01AJ502E1  
VHV-01AH553A1  
VPV-MOAJ524C0  
VPV-MOAH551B1  
UKV-25D22  
ACB-4UB83W  
CH-44  
Specifications  
Compressor  
2
Outdoor fan motor  
4-way valve coil  
DC 280 V, 100 W  
3
AC 220 – 240 V, 50 Hz  
AC 220 V, 60 Hz  
AC 220 – 240 V, 50 Hz  
AC 220 V, 60 Hz  
DC 12 V  
4
4-way valve coil (for AT7)  
2-way valve coil  
5
6
2-way valve coil (for AT7)  
PMV coil  
7
8
High pressure switch  
OFF : 4.15 MPa  
1.4 mH, 25 A  
18 mH, 5 A  
9
Reactor  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
Reactor  
CH-68  
Reactor  
CH-56  
5.8 mH, 18.5 A  
P.C. board (Compressor drive)  
P.C. board (Fan motor drive)  
P.C. board (Control)  
MCC-1596  
MCC-1597  
MCC-1599  
MCC-1600  
MCC-1436  
P.C. board (Noise filter)  
P.C. board (Fan extention)  
Outdoor temp. sensor (TO sensor)  
Discharge temp. sensor (TD sensor)  
Suction temp. sensor (TS sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TE sensor)  
Heat exchanger mid. temp. sensor (TL sensor)  
Fuse  
10 kat 25°C  
50 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
25 A, 250 V  
TLC 25A  
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board, MCC-1596)  
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board, MCC-1596)  
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board, MCC-1597)  
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board, MCC-1597)  
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board, MCC-1599)  
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board, MCC-1600)  
Relay  
GAC1 31.5A  
SCT 31.5A  
GDM 250V 15A  
SCT 31.5A  
FJL 250V 31.5A  
ET 6.3A  
31.5 A, 500 V  
T3.15 A, AC 250 V  
15 A, 250 V  
T3.15 A, AC 250 V  
T3.15 A, AC 250 V  
T6.3 A, AC 250 V  
Contact : AC 480 V, 20A  
100 , 500 V  
OFF : 125 ± 4 °C, ON : 60 ± 5 °C  
EL200/240A2-F(M)  
ZPR0YCE 101A 500  
US-622  
Posistor  
Compressor thermo.  
– 34 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. REFRIGERANT R410A  
This air conditioner adopts the new refrigerant HFC  
(R410A) which does not damage the ozone layer.  
6. When an air conditioning system charged with a  
large volume of refrigerant is installed in a small  
room, it is necessary to exercise care so that,  
even when refrigerant leaks, its concentration  
does not exceed the marginal level.  
The working pressure of the new refrigerant R410A  
is 1.6 times higher than conventional refrigerant  
(R22). The refrigerating oil is also changed in  
accordance with change of refrigerant, so be careful  
that water, dust, and existing refrigerant or  
refrigerating oil are not entered in the refrigerant  
cycle of the air conditioner using the new refrigerant  
during installation work or servicing time.  
If the refrigerant gas leakage occurs and its  
concentration exceeds the marginal level, an  
oxygen starvation accident may result.  
7. Be sure to carry out installation or removal  
according to the installation manual.  
The next section describes the precautions for air  
conditioner using the new refrigerant.  
Improper installation may cause refrigeration  
trouble, water leakage, electric shock, fire, etc.  
Conforming to contents of the next section together  
with the general cautions included in this manual,  
perform the correct and safe work.  
8. Unauthorized modifications to the air conditioner  
may be dangerous. If a breakdown occurs  
please call a qualified air conditioner technician  
or electrician.  
Improper repair may result in water leakage,  
electric shock and fire, etc.  
6-1. Safety During Installation/Servicing  
As R410A’s pressure is about 1.6 times higher than  
that of R22, improper installation/servicing may  
cause a serious trouble. By using tools and  
materials exclusive for R410A, it is necessary to  
carry out installation/servicing safely while taking  
the following precautions into consideration.  
6-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation  
6-2-1. Piping Materials and Joints Used  
For the refrigerant piping installation, copper pipes  
and joints are mainly used.  
1. Never use refrigerant other than R410A in an air  
conditioner which is designed to operate with  
R410A.  
Copper pipes and joints suitable for the refrigerant  
must be chosen and installed.  
Furthermore, it is necessary to use clean copper  
pipes and joints whose interior surfaces are less  
affected by contaminants.  
If other refrigerant than R410A is mixed,  
pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes  
abnormally high, and it may cause personal  
injury, etc. by a rupture.  
1. Copper Pipes  
2. Confirm the used refrigerant name, and use  
tools and materials exclusive for the refrigerant  
R410A.  
It is necessary to use seamless copper pipes  
which are made of either copper or copper alloy  
and it is desirable that the amount of residual oil  
is less than 40 mg/10 m.  
The refrigerant name R410A is indicated on the  
visible place of the outdoor unit of the air  
conditioner using R410A as refrigerant.  
Do not use copper pipes having a collapsed,  
deformed or discolored portion (especially on  
the interior surface).  
To prevent mischarging, the diameter of the  
service port differs from that of R22.  
Otherwise, the expansion valve or capillary tube  
may become blocked with contaminants.  
3. If a refrigeration gas leakage occurs during  
installation/servicing, be sure to ventilate fully.  
As an air conditioner using R410A incurs pres-  
sure higher than when using R22, it is necessary  
to choose adequate materials.  
If the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire,  
a poisonous gas may occur.  
4. When installing or removing an air conditioner,  
do not allow air or moisture to remain in the  
refrigeration cycle.  
Thicknesses of copper pipes used with R410A  
are as shown in Table 6-2-1. Never use copper  
pipes thinner than 0.8mm even when it is avail-  
able on the market.  
Otherwise, pressure in the refrigeration cycle  
may become abnormally high so that a rupture  
or personal injury may be caused.  
5. After completion of installation work, check to  
make sure that there is no refrigeration gas  
leakage.  
NOTE  
Refer to the “6-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping  
of R22 or R407C”.  
If the refrigerant gas leaks into the room, coming  
into contact with fire in the fan-driven heater,  
space heater, etc., a poisonous gas may occur.  
– 35 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 6-2-1 Thicknesses of annealed copper pipes  
Thickness (mm)  
Nominal diameter  
Outer diameter (mm)  
R410A  
0.80  
R22  
0.80  
0.80  
0.80  
1.00  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.80  
12.7  
15.9  
0.80  
1.00  
1. Joints  
For copper pipes, flare joints or socket joints are used. Prior to use, be sure to remove all contaminants.  
a) Flare Joints  
Flare joints used to connect the copper pipes cannot be used for pipings whose outer diameter exceeds  
20 mm. In such a case, socket joints can be used.  
Sizes of flare pipe ends, flare joint ends and flare nuts are as shown in Tables 6-2-3 to 6-2-5 below.  
b) Socket Joints  
Socket joints are such that they are brazed for connections, and used mainly for thick pipings whose  
diameter is larger than 20 mm. Thicknesses of socket joints are as shown in Table 6-2-2.  
Table 6-2-2 Minimum thicknesses of socket joints  
Reference outer diameter of  
copper pipe jointed (mm)  
Minimum joint thickness  
(mm)  
Nominal diameter  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.50  
0.60  
0.70  
0.80  
12.7  
15.9  
6-2-2. Processing of Piping Materials  
When performing the refrigerant piping installation, care should be taken to ensure that water or dust does not  
enter the pipe interior, that no other oil other than lubricating oils used in the installed air conditioner is used,  
and that refrigerant does not leak.  
When using lubricating oils in the piping processing, use such lubricating oils whose water content has been  
removed. When stored, be sure to seal the container with an airtight cap or any other cover.  
1. Flare Processing Procedures and Precautions  
a) Cutting the Pipe  
By means of a pipe cutter, slowly cut the pipe so that it is not deformed.  
b) Removing Burrs and Chips  
If the flared section has chips or burrs, refrigerant leakage may occur.  
Carefully remove all burrs and clean the cut surface before installation.  
– 36 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c) Insertion of Flare Nut  
d) Flare Processing  
Make certain that a clamp bar and copper pipe have been cleaned.  
By means of the clamp bar, perform the flare processing correctly.  
Use either a flare tool for R410A or conventional flare tool.  
ØD  
A
Flare processing dimensions differ according  
to the type of flare tool.  
When using a conventional flare tool, be sure  
to secure “dimension A” by using a gauge for  
size adjustment.  
Fig. 6-2-1 Flare processing dimensions  
Table 6-2-3 Dimensions related to flare processing for R410A / R22  
A (mm)  
Outer  
diameter  
(mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Conventional flare tool  
(R410A)  
Conventional flare tool  
(R22)  
Flare tool for  
R410A, R22  
clutch type  
Clutch type Wing nut type Clutch type Wing nut type  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
3/4  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.2  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.5 to 2.0  
1.5 to 2.0  
2.0 to 2.5  
2.0 to 2.5  
2.0 to 2.5  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.5 to 2.0  
1.5 to 2.0  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
Table 6-2-4 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R410A  
Dimension (mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Flare nut width  
(mm)  
(mm)  
A
B
C
D
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
3/4  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.2  
9.1  
9.2  
6.5  
13  
20  
23  
25  
28  
17  
22  
26  
29  
36  
13.2  
16.6  
19.7  
24.0  
13.5  
16.0  
19.0  
9.7  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
12.9  
16.0  
19.2  
Table 6-2-5 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R22  
Dimension (mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Flare nut width  
(mm)  
(mm)  
A
B
C
D
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
3/4  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.0  
9.1  
9.2  
6.5  
13  
20  
20  
23  
34  
17  
22  
24  
27  
36  
13.0  
16.2  
19.4  
23.3  
13.5  
16.0  
19.0  
24.0  
9.7  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
12.9  
16.0  
19.2  
– 37 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
A
B
C
Fig. 6-2-2 Relations between flare nut and flare seal surface  
2. Flare Connecting Procedures and Precautions  
a) Make sure that the flare and union portions do not have any scar or dust, etc.  
b) Correctly align the processed flare surface with the union axis.  
c) Tighten the flare with designated torque by means of a torque wrench.  
The tightening torque for R410A is the same as that for conventional R22.  
Incidentally, when the torque is weak, the gas leakage may occur.  
When it is strong, the flare nut may crack and may be made non-removable.  
When choosing the tightening torque, comply with values designated by manufacturers.  
Table 6-2-6 shows reference values.  
NOTE  
When applying oil to the flare surface, be sure to use oil designated by the manufacturer.  
If any other oil is used, the lubricating oils may deteriorate and cause the compressor to burn out.  
Table 6-2-6 Tightening torque of flare for R410A [Reference values]  
Tightening torque of torque  
wrenches available on the market  
N•m (kgf•m)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
(mm)  
Tightening torque  
N•m (kgf•m)  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
3/4  
6.4  
9.5  
14 to 18 (1.4 to 1.8)  
33 to 42 (3.3 to 4.2)  
50 to 62 (5.0 to 6.2)  
63 to 77 (6.3 to 7.7)  
100 to 120 (10.0 to 12.0)  
16 (1.6), 18 (1.8)  
42 (4.2)  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
55 (5.5)  
65 (6.5)  
——  
– 38 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3. Tools  
6-3-1. RequiredTools  
Refer to the “4.Tools” (Page 8)  
6-4. Recharging of Refrigerant  
When it is necessary to recharge refrigerant, charge the specified amount of new refrigerant according to the  
following steps.  
Recover the refrigerant, and check no refrigerant  
remains in the equipment.  
When the compound gauges pointer has indicated  
0.1 Mpa (76 cmHg), place the handle Low in the  
fully closed position, and turn off the vacuum pumps  
power switch.  
Connect the charge hose to packed valve service  
port at the outdoor units gas side.  
Keep the status as it is for 1 to 2 minutes, and ensure  
that the compound gauges pointer does not return.  
Connect the charge hose of the vacuum pump  
adapter.  
Set the refrigerant cylinder to the electronic balance,  
connect the connecting hose to the cylinder and the  
connecting port of the electronic balance, and charge  
liquid refrigerant.  
Open fully both packed valves at liquid and gas  
sides.  
Place the handle of the gauge manifold Low in the  
fully opened position, and turn on the vacuum pumps  
power switch. Then, evacuating the refrigerant in the  
cycle.  
(For refrigerant charging, see the figure below.)  
1) Never charge refrigerant exceeding the specified amount.  
2) If the specified amount of refrigerant cannot be charged, charge refrigerant bit by bit in COOL mode.  
3) Do not carry out additional charging.  
When additional charging is carried out if refrigerant leaks, the refrigerant composition changes in the refrigera-  
tion cycle, that is characteristics of the air conditioner changes, refrigerant exceeding the specified amount is  
charged, and working pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes abnormally high pressure, and may cause a  
rupture or personal injury.  
(INDOOR unit)  
(Liquid side)  
(OUTDOOR unit)  
Opened  
Closed  
(Gas side)  
Refrigerant cylinder  
(With siphon pipe)  
Check valve  
Open/Close valve  
for charging  
Service port  
Electronic balance for refrigerant charging  
Fig. 6-4-1 Configuration of refrigerant charging  
– 39 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1) Be sure to make setting so that liquid can be charged.  
2) When using a cylinder equipped with a siphon, liquid can be charged without turning it upside down.  
It is necessary for charging refrigerant under condition of liquid because R410A is mixed type of refrigerant.  
Accordingly, when charging refrigerant from the refrigerant cylinder to the equipment, charge it turning the  
cylinder upside down if cylinder is not equipped with siphon.  
[ Cylinder with siphon ]  
[ Cylinder without siphon ]  
Gauge manifold  
Gauge manifold  
OUTDOOR unit  
OUTDOOR unit  
c y l i n d e r  
a n t i g e r R e f r  
Refrigerant  
cylinder  
Electronic  
balance  
Electronic  
balance  
Siphon  
R410A refrigerant is HFC mixed refrigerant.  
Therefore, if it is charged with gas, the composition  
of the charged refrigerant changes and the  
characteristics of the equipment varies.  
Fig. 6-4-2  
6-5. Brazing of Pipes  
6-5-1. Materials for Brazing  
1. Silver brazing filler  
1) Phosphor bronze brazing filler tends to react with  
sulfur and produce a fragile compound water  
solution, which may cause a gas leakage.  
Therefore, use any other type of brazing filler at  
a hot spring resort, etc., and coat the surface  
with a paint.  
Silver brazing filler is an alloy mainly composed  
of silver and copper.  
It is used to join iron, copper or copper alloy, and  
is relatively expensive though it excels in solder-  
ability.  
2) When performing brazing again at time of  
servicing, use the same type of brazing filler.  
2. Phosphor bronze brazing filler  
6-5-2. Flux  
Phosphor bronze brazing filler is generally used  
to join copper or copper alloy.  
1. Reason why flux is necessary  
• By removing the oxide film and any foreign  
matter on the metal surface, it assists the flow  
of brazing filler.  
3. Low temperature brazing filler  
Low temperature brazing filler is generally called  
solder, and is an alloy of tin and lead.  
• In the brazing process, it prevents the metal  
surface from being oxidized.  
Since it is weak in adhesive strength, do not use  
it for refrigerant pipes.  
• By reducing the brazing filler's surface tension,  
the brazing filler adheres better to the treated  
metal.  
– 40 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Characteristics required for flux  
6-5-3. Brazing  
• Activated temperature of flux coincides with  
the brazing temperature.  
As brazing work requires sophisticated techniques,  
experiences based upon a theoretical knowledge, it  
must be performed by a person qualified.  
• Due to a wide effective temperature range, flux  
is hard to carbonize.  
In order to prevent the oxide film from occurring in  
the pipe interior during brazing, it is effective to  
proceed with brazing while letting dry Nitrogen gas  
flow.  
• It is easy to remove slag after brazing.  
• The corrosive action to the treated metal and  
brazing filler is minimum.  
• It excels in coating performance and is  
harmless to the human body.  
Never use gas other than Nitrogen gas.  
1. Brazing method to prevent oxidation  
As the flux works in a complicated manner as  
described above, it is necessary to select an  
adequate type of flux according to the type and  
shape of treated metal, type of brazing filler and  
brazing method, etc.  
1) Attach a reducing valve and a flow-meter to  
the Nitrogen gas cylinder.  
2) Use a copper pipe to direct the piping  
material, and attach a flow-meter to the  
cylinder.  
3. Types of flux  
• Noncorrosive flux  
Generally, it is a compound of borax and boric  
acid.  
3) Apply a seal onto the clearance between the  
piping material and inserted copper pipe for  
Nitrogen in order to prevent backflow of the  
Nitrogen gas.  
It is effective in case where the brazing  
temperature is higher than 800°C.  
4) When the Nitrogen gas is flowing, be sure to  
keep the piping end open.  
• Activated flux  
Most of fluxes generally used for silver brazing  
are this type.  
5) Adjust the flow rate of Nitrogen gas so that it  
is lower than 0.05 m³/Hr or 0.02 MPa  
It features an increased oxide film removing  
capability due to the addition of compounds  
such as potassium fluoride, potassium chloride  
and sodium fluoride to the borax-boric acid  
compound.  
(0.2kgf/cm²) by means of the reducing valve.  
6) After performing the steps above, keep the  
Nitrogen gas flowing until the pipe cools down  
to a certain extent (temperature at which  
pipes are touchable with hands).  
7) Remove the flux completely after brazing.  
4. Piping materials for brazing and used  
brazing filler/flux  
Piping material Used brazing filler  
Used flux  
Do not use  
Paste flux  
Vapor flux  
Copper - Copper  
Copper - Iron  
Iron - Iron  
Phosphor copper  
Silver  
M
Flow meter  
Silver  
Stop valve  
Nitrogen gas  
cylinder  
1) Do not enter flux into the refrigeration cycle.  
From Nitrogen cylinder  
2) When chlorine contained in the flux remains  
within the pipe, the lubricating oil deteriorates.  
Therefore, use a flux which does not contain  
chlorine.  
Pipe  
Nitrogen  
gas  
3) When adding water to the flux, use water which  
does not contain chlorine  
Rubber plug  
(e.g. distilled water or ion-exchange water).  
4) Remove the flux after brazing.  
Fig. 6-5-1 Prevention of oxidation during brazing  
– 41 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping of R22 or R407C  
5. A dryer on the market is attached to the existing pipes.  
Instruction of Works:  
The existing R22 and R407C piping can be  
reused for our digital inverter R410A products  
installations.  
• There is possibility that copper green rust  
generated.  
6. Check the oil when the existing air conditioner was  
removed after refrigerant had been recovered.  
In this case, if the oil is judged as clearly different  
compared with normal oil  
WARNING  
Confirming the existence of scratches or dents on the  
existing pipes and confirming the reliability of the pipe  
strength are conventionally referred to the local site.  
• The refrigerator oil is copper rust green :  
There is possibility that moisture is mixed with the  
oil and rust generates inside of the pipe.  
If the definite conditions can be cleared,  
it is possible to update the existing R22 and  
R407C pipes to those for R410A models.  
• There is discolored oil, a large quantity of the  
remains, or bad smell.  
• A large quantity of sparkle remained wear-out  
powder is observed in the refrigerator oil.  
6-6-1. Basic Conditions Needed to Reuse the  
Existing Pipe  
Check and observe three conditions of the refrigerant  
piping works.  
7. The air conditioner which compressor was ex-  
changed due to a faulty compressor.  
When the discolored oil, a large quantity of the  
remains, mixture of foreign matter, or a large  
quantity of sparkle remained wear-out powder is  
observed, the cause of trouble will occur.  
1. Dry  
(There is no moisture inside of the pipes.)  
2. Clean (There is no dust inside of the pipes.)  
3. Tight (There is no refrigerant leak.)  
8. Installation and removal of the air conditioner are  
repeated with temporary installation by lease and etc.  
6-6-2. Restricted Items to Use the Existing Pipes  
9. In case that type of the refrigerator oil of the  
existing air conditioner is other than the following oil  
(Mineral oil), Suniso, Freol-S, MS (Synthetic oil),  
alkyl benzene (HAB, Barrel-freeze), ester series,  
PVE only of ether series.  
In the following cases, the existing pipes cannot be  
reused as they are. Clean the existing pipes or  
exchange them with new pipes.  
1. When a scratch or dent is heavy, be sure to use the  
new pipes for the works.  
• Winding-insulation of the compressor may  
become inferior.  
2. When the thickness of the existing pipe is thinner  
than the specified “Pipe diameter and thickness” be  
sure to use the new pipes for the works.  
NOTE  
The above descriptions are results of confirmation by our  
company and they are views on our air conditioners, but  
they do not guarantee the use of the existing pipes of the  
air conditioner that adopted R410A in other companies.  
• The operating pressure of R410A is high  
(1.6 times of R22 and R407C). If there is a scratch  
or dent on the pipe or thinner pipe is used, the  
pressure strength is poor and may cause break-  
age of the pipe at the worst.  
6-6-3. Branching Pipe for Simultaneous  
Operation System  
Pipe diameter and thickness (mm)  
Reference outside  
diameter (mm)  
Wall thickness  
(mm)  
• In the concurrent twin system, when TOSHIBA-  
specified branching pipe is used, it can be reused.  
Branching pipe model name:  
RBC-TWP30E-2, RBC-TWP50E-2, RBC-TRP100E  
On the existing air conditioner for simultaneous  
operation system (twin system), there is a case of  
using branch pipe that has insufficient compressive  
strength. In this case please change it to the branch  
pipe for R410A.  
Material  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.2  
1.0  
1.0  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
22.2  
28.6  
Half hard  
Half hard  
6-6-4. Curing of Pipes  
When removing and opening the indoor unit or outdoor  
unit for a long time, cure the pipes as follows:  
• In case that the pipe diameter is Ø12.7 mm or less  
and the thickness is less than 0.7 mm, be sure to  
use the new pipes for works.  
• Otherwise rust may generate when moisture or  
foreign matter due to dewing enters in the pipes.  
3. The pipes are left as coming out or gas leaks.  
(Poor refrigerant)  
• The rust cannot be removed by cleaning, and a new  
piping work is necessary.  
• There is possibility that rain water or air including  
moisture enters in the pipe.  
4. Refrigerant recovery is impossible.  
(Refrigerant recovery by the pump-down operation  
on the existing air conditioner)  
Place position  
Term  
Curing manner  
1 month or more  
Less than 1 month  
Every time  
Pinching  
Outdoors  
Indoors  
• There is possibility that a large quantity of poor  
oil or moisture remains inside of the pipe.  
Pinching or taping  
– 42 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6-5. Final Installation Checks  
Is there no scratch or dent on the existing pipes?  
Existing pipe: NO * Use a new pipes.  
NO  
Is it possible to operate the existing air conditioner?  
YES  
After the existing air conditioner operated in cooling mode  
for approx. 30 minutes or longer*, recover the refrigerant.  
For cooling the pipes and recovering of oil  
Refrigerant recovery: Pump down method  
Nitrogen gas pressure 0.5 Mpa  
Remove the existing air conditioner from the piping and  
carry out flashing (nitrogen pressure 0.5 Mpa) to remove  
the remains inside of the pipe.  
Note] In case of twin, also be sure to flash the  
branching pipe.  
(If there is discharge of remains,  
it is judged that there is a large quantity of remains.)  
Was not largely discolored oil or  
a large quantity of remains discharged?  
(When the oil deteriorates, the color of the  
oil changes to muddy and black color.)  
NO  
Clean the pipes or use the new pipes.  
If you are in trouble of  
pipe cleaning, please contact us.  
YES  
Connect the indoor/outdoor units to the existing pipe.  
Use a flare nut attached to the main unit for the  
indoor/outdoor units.  
(Do not use the flare nut of the existing pipe.)  
Re-machine the flare machining size to size for R410A.  
Piping necessary to change the flare nut/  
machining size due to pipe compression.  
When using a Ø19.1 mm pipe for the gas pipe of the first  
branching pipe machining size due to pipe compression.  
1) Flare nut width: H  
(mm)  
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.1  
Turn the existing pipe switch on the cycle control  
Copper pipe  
P.C. board of the outdoor unit to ON side.  
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
outer dia.  
At shipment from factory OFF ON for existing pipe  
(Refer to the table below.)  
(Be sure to set the contents in the table below in order  
to restrict the refrigerating cycle pressure of the  
equipment in the pipe standard.)  
17  
22  
26  
24  
29  
27  
36  
For R410A  
H
Same  
For R22  
Same as above  
as above  
2) Flare machining size: A  
(mm)  
Existing pipe SW  
Copper pipe  
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
13.2  
13.0  
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.1  
outer dia.  
A
Switch  
9.1  
9.0  
16.6  
16.2  
19.7  
19.4  
24.0  
23.3  
For R410A  
For R22  
Bit 3 of SW802 ON  
Becomes large a little for R410A  
Do not apply the refrigerator oil to the flare surface.  
(Airtight test), Vacuum dry, Refrigerant charge,  
Gas leak check  
Trial run  
– 43 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• When using a Ø19.1 mm gas pipe for the existing  
piping, set bit 3 of SW802 (switch for existing pipe)  
on the P.C. board of the outdoor unit to ON.  
6-6-6. Handling of Existing Pipe  
When using the existing pipe, carefully check it for  
the following:  
In this case, the heating performance may be  
reduced depending on the outside air temperature  
and room temperature.  
• Wall thickness (within the specified range)  
• Scratches and dents  
• Water, oil, dirt, or dust in the pipe  
• Flare looseness and leakage from welds  
• Deterioration of copper pipe and heat insulator  
SW802  
When shipped from factory  
When using existing pipe  
• Before recovering the refrigerant in the existing  
system, perform a cooling operation for at least 30  
minutes.  
ON  
ON  
1
2 3 4  
1
2 3 4  
Cautions for using existing pipe  
• Do not reuse a flare nut to prevent gas leaks.  
Replace it with the supplied flare nut and then  
process it to a flare.  
• Blow nitrogen gas or use an appropriate means to  
keep the inside of the pipe clean.  
6-6-7. Recovering Refrigerant  
Use the refrigerant recovery equipment to recover  
the refrigerant.  
If discolored oil or much residue is discharged,  
wash the pipe.  
• Check welds, if any, on the pipe for gas leaks.  
• There may be a problem with the pressure resis-  
tance of the branching pipes of the existing piping.  
Replace them with branch pipes (sold separately).  
When the pipe corresponds to any of the following,  
do not use it. Install a new pipe instead.  
• The pipe has been opened (disconnected from  
indoor unit or outdoor unit) for a long period.  
• The pipe has been connected to an outdoor unit  
that does not use refrigerant R22, R410A or R407C.  
• The existing pipe must have a wall thickness equal  
to or larger than the following thicknesses.  
Reference outside  
diameter (mm)  
Wall thickness  
(mm)  
Material  
6.4  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.2  
1.0  
1.0  
9.5  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
22.2  
28.6  
Half hard  
Half hard  
• Do not use any pipe with a wall thickness less than  
these thicknesses due to insufficient pressure  
capacity.  
– 44 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS  
7-1. Outdoor Unit Control  
7-1-1. Print Circuit Board, MCC-1596 (Compressor IPDU)  
CN851 (Red)  
Connector for MCC-1597 (CN505)  
CN07 (Blue), CN08 (Blue)  
Terminal for reactor CH44  
CN101 (White)  
Connector for MCC-1597 (CN502)  
CN03 (Black)  
Terminal for power relay  
F02  
Electric circuit protective fuse  
(500V, 31.5A)  
CN02 (White)  
Terminal for MCC-1600 (CN17)  
F01  
Electric circuit protective fuse  
(500V, 31.5A)  
CN01 (Red)  
Terminal for power relay  
CN04 (Red)  
Terminal for PTC thermistor  
CN201 (Red), CN202 (White), CN203 (Black)  
Compressor output terminal  
CN09 (Yellow), CN10 (Yellow)  
Terminal for reactor CH44  
– 45 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1-2. Print Circuit Board, MCC-1597 (Fan Motor IPDU)  
CN750 (White)  
Fan motor output (Upper side)  
CN700 (Blue)  
Connector for MCC-1436 (CN03 or CN07)  
CN500 (Red)  
Connector for MCC-1600 (CN23)  
and reactor CH68  
CN504 (Blue)  
Connector for MCC-1599  
(CN802)  
CN602 (Black)  
Connector for MCC-1600 (CN51)  
F500  
Electric circuit protective fuse  
(250V, 15A)  
P501 (Black)  
Lead wire for grounding  
CN505 (Red)  
Connector for MCC-1596 (CN851)  
CN502 (White)  
Connector for MCC-1596 (CN101)  
– 46 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1-3. Print Circuit Board, MCC-1599 (Interface (CDB))  
CN708 (Blue)  
Connector for power relay coil  
CN608 (White)  
Connector for MCC-1600 (CN50)  
CN02 (Red)  
Connector for  
MCC-1600 (CN10 and CN19)  
CN802 (White)  
Connector for MCC-1597 (CN504)  
CN702 (White)  
2-way valve connector  
F01  
CN700 (Yellow)  
4-way valve connector  
Power supply protective fuse  
(250V, 3.15A)  
Temp.sensor connector  
CN604 (White) TL sensor  
CN603 (White) TD sensor  
CN602 (Yellow) TO sensor  
CN601 (White) TE sensor  
CN600 (White) TS sensor  
Specific operation switch  
SW801  
SW804  
SW805  
SW806  
Display select switch  
SW800  
SW803  
Initial setting switch  
SW802  
Power-ON,error display LED  
D800 to D804 (Yellow)  
D805 (Green)  
Indoor/Outdoor communication  
signal LED  
D503 (Green), (Outdoor Indoor)  
D502 (Orange), (Indoor Outdoor)  
CN690 (Green)  
High-pressure  
switch connector  
CN609 (Blue)  
Case thermostat  
connector  
CN606 (White)  
Low-pressure  
sensor connector  
CN711 (White)  
PMV2 Connector  
CN704 (Blue)  
Compressor ON  
out put connector  
CN610 (Yellow)  
Outside input connector  
CN710 (White)  
PMV1 Connector  
CN01 (White)  
Inter-unit cable connector  
– 47 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1-4. Print Circuit Board, MCC-1600 (Noise Filter)  
CN05 (Red)  
CN16 (Red)  
CN10 (Red)  
Power supply terminal (L1)  
T
erminal for power relay  
T
erminal for MCC-1599 (CN02) and Terminal for PTC thermistor  
F01  
V
aristor protective fuse  
(250V, 6.3A)  
CN06 (White)  
Power supply terminal (L2)  
CN17 (White)  
T
erminal for  
F02  
MCC-1596 (CN02)  
Varistor protective fuse  
(250V, 6.3A)  
CN18 (Black)  
T
erminal for  
power relay  
CN07 (Black)  
Power supply terminal (L3)  
CN19 (Gray)  
T
erminal for  
MCC-1599 (CN02)  
F03  
V
aristor protective fuse  
CN09 (Brown)  
(250V, 6.3A)  
T
erminal for  
grounding  
CN20 (White)  
CN23 (Red)  
Power supply terminal (L2)  
Connector for  
MCC-1597 (CN500)  
CN08 (Gray)  
eutral terminal  
N
CN51 (Black)  
onnector for  
MCC-1597 (CN602)  
CN50 (White)  
onnector for  
MCC-1599 (CN608)  
C
C
– 48 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2. Outline of Main Controls  
1. PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) control  
1) The aperture of the PMV (1, 2) is controlled between 88 (44 + 44) to 1000 (500 + 500) pulses during  
operation.  
2) During cooling and heating operations, the PMV aperture is controlled by the temperature difference  
between a detected temperature from a TS sensor and a saturation temperature equivalent value  
(TU temperature) from a Ps sensor. (SH control).  
3) The temperature difference in 2) in both cooling and heating operations is usually controlled using a 5K  
target value.  
(However control may be performed within a range of 1 – 15K depending on operating conditions).  
4) When the cycle overheats during both cooling and heating operations, the PMV aperture is controlled  
using a detection value from a TD sensor.  
The normal target value is 96°C for cooling operations and 102°C for heating operations.  
CAUTION  
Sensor malfunction may cause liquid back-flow or error overheating in the compressor resulting in dramatic  
reduction in the durable life of the compressor.  
In the event of malfunction and repair of the compressor, restart operation after checking that there are no  
errors in the resistance values or the refrigerating cycle of each sensor.  
2. Discharge temperature release control  
TD (˚C)  
1) This control lowers the revolution number of the  
Abnormal stop  
compressor in the event that the discharge  
([P03] is displayed with count 4 of errors)  
115  
temperature is not reduced or in the event the  
discharge temperature increases rapidly during  
PMV control.  
Frequency normal down  
113  
The cycle is stabilized by dividing compressor  
revolution number control into units up to 0.6 rps.  
Frequency slow down  
2) When the detected discharge temperature is in  
an error zone, compressor operation is stopped  
and then restarted after 2 minutes 30 seconds.  
105  
102  
Frequency hold  
An error count is added on each occasion the  
error zone is detected and when the error is  
detected 4 times, a “P03” error is performed.  
Frequency slow up (Until command)  
95  
When normal operation continues for a period of  
10 minutes, the error count is cleared.  
According to command  
– 49 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Outdoor fan revolution number control  
Control of fan revolution number and the fan taps in this unit are shown below.  
Fan Taps Revolution number Allocation [rpm]  
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 WA WB WC WD WE WF  
Upper Fan 250 280 280 310 340 400 460 520 580 640 710 760 830 860 920  
Lower Fan 250 270 300 350 410 470 530 590 640 710 770 810 850  
Upper Fan 250 280 280 340 400 460 520 580 640 710 760 830 860 920 940  
Lower Fan 250 300 350 410 470 530 590 640 710 770 810 850 920  
SM224  
SM280  
0
0
0
0
3-1. Cooling fan control  
1) Cooling operations of the outdoor fan are controlled by a TL sensor, TO sensor and the compressor  
revolution number. Control is performed per 1 tap of DC fan control.  
The outdoor fan is controlled by every 1 tap of DC fan control (14 taps).  
During startup, operation is fixed for 60 seconds to a maximum fan tap corresponding to the zones  
shown in the table below.Thereafter fan tap is controlled by a temperature outputted from the TL sensor.  
45 rps or more  
and less than 60 rps  
TL (˚C)  
Less than 45 rps  
60 rps or more  
58  
55  
Min.  
W6  
W5  
W3  
W2  
W1  
W1  
W1  
W1  
Max.  
WE  
WD  
WA  
W8  
W6  
W5  
W4  
WE  
Min.  
W8  
W7  
W5  
W4  
W3  
W2  
W3  
W3  
Max.  
WF  
WF  
WC  
WA  
W8  
W7  
W5  
WF  
Min.  
WA  
W9  
W7  
W6  
W4  
W3  
W3  
W3  
Max.  
WF  
WF  
WE  
WC  
WA  
W8  
W6  
WF  
WF tap  
38°C TO  
29°C TO < 38°C  
15 TO < 29°C  
5 TO < 15°C  
0 TO < 5°C  
–5 TO < 0°C  
TO < –5°C  
+1 tap / 20 sec.  
Until Maximum rps  
in each zone  
(
)
37  
Revolution number HOLD  
34  
1 tap / 20 sec.  
Until Minimum rps  
(
)
TO error  
in each zone  
3-2 Heating fan control  
1) Heating operations of the outdoor fan are controlled by a TE sensor, TO sensor and the compressor  
revolution number.  
(Control from a minimum W1 to a maximum is performed according to the table below).  
2) Operation is fixed for 3 minutes after start up by a maximum fan tap corresponding to the zones in the  
table below. Thereafter fan control is performed using the temperature from the TE sensor.  
3) When TE 24°C continues for 5 minutes, the compressor is stopped. The compressor is placed in  
the same state as a normal thermostat OFF without an error display.  
The compressor is restarted after approximately 2 minutes 30 seconds and such interrupted operation  
does not constitute an error. When the operation in 3) above is frequently performed, the filter of the  
intake section of the indoor unit may require cleaning.  
Therefore restart operation after cleaning the filter.  
TE (˚C)  
2 taps / 20 sec.  
Stop timer count  
(Until W1)  
Less than  
45 rps  
45 rps or more  
60 rps  
and less than 60 rps  
or more  
24  
21  
18  
2 taps / 20 sec.  
10°C TO  
WA  
WC  
WF  
WF  
WF  
WF  
WB  
WD  
WF  
WF  
WF  
WF  
WC  
WF  
WF  
WF  
WF  
WF  
(Until W1)  
5 TO < 10°C  
–3 TO < 5°C  
–10 TO < –3°C  
TO < –10°C  
TO error  
1 tap / 20 sec.  
(Until W1)  
Maximum  
Revolution number HOLD  
+1 tap / 20 sec.  
15  
– 50 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Defrost control  
1) During heating operations, defrost operations are performed when the temperature from the TE sensor  
satisfies any of the conditions in the A to D zones.  
2) During defrosting operations, defrost will be terminated if the temperature from the TE sensor continues  
at 12°C or higher for 3 seconds or if the temperature is 7°C TE < 12°C for 1 minute.  
Furthermore the defrost operation will be terminated if defrosting operations have continued for  
10 minutes even if TE sensor temperature is less than 7°C.  
3) After defrost operations have been reset, the compressor restarts heating operations without stopping.  
Start warming operation  
0
10  
15  
39  
45  
55  
90 [min.]  
TE [˚C]  
2  
5  
10  
18  
A zone  
B zone  
C zone  
D zone  
The minimum TE value during 10 and 15 minutes after starting heating operation is stored as TEO.  
WhenTo is normal  
WhenTo is abnormal  
A Zone  
B Zone  
C Zone  
D Zone  
Status [(TEO-TE) – (ToO-To) 3°C] continues for 20 seconds  
Status [(TEO-TE) – (ToO-To) 2°C] continues for 20 seconds  
Status [TEO- TE 3°C] continues for 20 seconds  
Status [TEO-TE 2°C] continues for 20 seconds  
Status [TE 23°C] continues for 20 seconds  
When compressor operation status TE < 2°C is calculated for d minutes  
4) The above time of d can be changed by selecting jumper [J805] or [J806].  
(Setting at shipment; 90 minutes)  
J805  
¡
¡
×
J806  
¡
×
¡
×
d
150 minutes  
90 minutes (Setting at shipment)  
60 minutes  
30 minutes  
×
: Short-circuit, : Open  
¡
×
5. Short interrupted operation preventive control  
1) Even when a thermostat OFF signal is received from the indoor unit, the compressor may not stop  
during an 8 minute period after startup in order to protect the compressor.  
This operation is not an error condition.  
2) When operation is terminated by using a remote controller, operation will not continue.  
6. Electrical current release control  
An AC current detection value from T611 on the IPDU control board is used to suppress the revolution  
number of the compressor so that the input current of the inverter does not exceed a specified value.  
A Zone  
D Zone  
B Zone  
Normal operation.  
Current (A)  
Maintain frequency of current operation.  
Reduce operating frequency.  
B zone  
l1  
Cease reduction of operating frequency  
and maintain frequency of current operation.  
C Zone  
D zone  
C zone  
SM224Type  
SM280Type  
l10.5  
l1 value (A)  
15.7  
17.6  
A zone  
– 51 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Heat sink temperature detection control  
1) IGBT overheating prevention is protective control performed by a thermistor (TH sensor) in proximity to IGBT.  
2) When a temperature of TH 83°C is detected, the fan tap is moved by 1 step up.  
Thereafter step-up is performed at a rate of +1 tap/5 seconds until a maximum fan tap is reached.  
3) After 2) above, operation is returned to normal fan control at a temperature of TH < 78°C.  
4) Operation of the compressor is terminated at a temperature of TH 100°C.  
5) Operation is restarted after 2 minutes and 30 seconds using [1] as the error count. However a count of  
[4] in the same operation confirms an error. The error display is “P07” (Restart will not be performed).  
When error is confirmed, this may be an error caused by heat build-up or blower fan failure in the outdoor  
unit, or an error in the IPDU board.  
The correction is based on the table below:  
8. Electrical current release value shift control  
1) This control is for the purpose of preventing  
malfunction of the compressor or electronic  
components such as the IGBT of the inverter in  
the compressor drive system during cooling  
operations.  
Temp. range  
50°C TO  
SM224  
9.0  
SM280  
9.0  
47°C TO < 50°C  
44°C TO < 47°C  
TO < 44°C  
11.0  
14.0  
15.7  
9.0  
11.0  
14.0  
17.6  
9.0  
2) Select the current release control value (I1) by  
TO sensor value from the right table.  
TO error  
9. Over-current protective control  
1) Operation of the compressor is stopped when the over-current protective circuit detects an error current.  
2) The compressor restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds using [1] as an error count.  
After restart, the error count is cleared when operation continues for 6 minutes or more.  
3) An error is confirmed when the error count takes a value of [8].  
4) For the indicated contents of error, confirm using the check code table.  
10. High-pressure switch/Compressor case thermostat control  
1) When the high-pressure switch or the compressor case thermostat operates, the operation of the  
compressor is terminated.  
2) The compressor restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds using [1] as an error count.  
After restart, the error count is cleared when operation continues for 10 minutes or more.  
3) An error is confirmed with the error count [10].  
4) For the indicated contents of error, confirm using the check code table.  
11. High-pressure release control  
1) The operation frequency is controlled to restrain abnormal rising of high pressure by TL sensor in  
cooling operation and TC sensor in heating operation.  
2) When TL sensor in cooling operation or TC sensor in heating operation detects abnormal temperature of  
the stop zone, stop the compressor and the error count becomes +1.  
3) When the compressor stopped with 2), the operation restarts from the point of the normal operation  
zone (e point or lower) where it returned after 2 minutes 30 seconds.  
4) The error count when the compressor stopped with 2) is cleared after the operation continued for  
10 minutes. If the error count becomes [10] without clearing, the error is determined and reactivation is  
not performed.  
5) For the error display contents, confirm on the check code list.  
HEAT  
TC  
COOL  
TL  
HEAT TC / COOL TL  
[°C]  
Abnormal stop  
Frequency normal down  
Frequency slow down  
Frequency hold  
a
a
b
c
d
e
62°C  
57°C  
55°C  
53°C  
49°C  
63°C  
62°C  
60°C  
58°C  
54°C  
b
c
d
Frequency slow up (Up to command)  
As command is  
e
– 52 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. SV2 valve control  
The conditions for opening and closing the SV2 valve are shown in the table below.  
SV2 Valve “Open” Conditions  
SV2 Valve “Close” Conditions  
(1)  
(2)  
When operation stopped after operating  
When operation started after operating or when 30 minutes  
elapsed after opening SV2 under conditions (1) (2)  
Non-operation  
When power placed “ON”  
When 8 minutes elapsed after starting operation.  
When 30 second elapses after first startup  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
During Cooling  
Operations  
operation when power ON at TO 5° C  
When Ps 0.27 MPa  
When Ps 0.23 MPa  
When 8 minutes elapsed after starting operation or when  
TC 26°C  
When 30 second elapses after first startup  
operation when power ON at TC < 26°C  
During Heating  
Operations  
When Ps 0.19 MPa  
(6)  
(7)  
When Ps 0.14 MPa  
When 4-way valve is OFF during defrost startup.  
When conditions for defrost satisfied.  
During  
Defrost  
Operation  
When 2 minutes elapsed after four-way valve is ON after  
defrost completion  
(8)  
When conditions for defrost satisfied.  
Defrost  
start condition  
Defrost  
completion condition  
Defrost operation  
66rps  
Compressor  
revolution number  
36rps  
ON  
OFF  
4-way valve  
SV2  
2 minutes  
Open  
Close  
13. Oil recovery control  
1) This control enables periodic recovery of oil accumulating in the indoor unit or in the exchange pipe.  
2) After continuous operation for 240 minutes, the lower limit for the compressor revolution number is  
raised for 2 minutes and oil is recovered.  
Control Conditions  
Control Details  
Lower limit for compressor revolution number placed to 56 rps per  
2 minutes  
During Cooling  
During Heating  
Continuous cooling operation for 240 minutes  
Lower limit for compressor revolution number placed to 70 rps per  
2 minutes  
Continuous heating operation for 240 minutes  
3)  
The compressor rotation speed is raised to the lower limit  
during control.  
When low  
During startup of oil recovery control, the compressor  
revolution number during operation is lower than the  
revolution number of the lower limit for control details.  
Operate according to indoor commands without lowering  
the compressor rotation speed to the lower limit.  
(In this case, the timer counts 2 minutes.)  
When high  
4) When the DOWN zone and the HOLD zone (UP prohibition) are superimposed for example during  
current release control or discharge temperature release control, DOWN zone and the HOLD zone have  
priority over oil recovery control.  
– 53 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. Coil heating control  
1) This control has the function of heating the compressor by applying a current to the compressor when  
not operating instead using a case heater.  
This control is for the purpose of preventing stagnation of the refrigerant inside the compressor.  
2) Malfunction in the compressor may result if a current is not applied for a specified time before a test run  
after installation as was previously the case.  
Similarly, starting operation after turning the power OFF and not operating for a long time also requires  
application of a current before starting operation, in the same manner as the test run.  
3) Application of current is determined by TD and TO sensors.  
When the TO sensor is defective, a backup control is automatically performed by the TE sensor.  
When TO sensor is defective, make a determination using the LED display of the outdoor interface board.  
4) The power is turned off when TD is 30°C or more.  
(When TO sensor defective)  
TO [˚C]  
TE [˚C]  
No current  
No current  
Current application  
conditions  
Current application  
conditions  
18  
15  
10  
20  
18  
12  
TD < 30˚C  
TD < 30˚C  
Intermittent current  
ON: 10 minutes  
OFF: 5 minutes  
Intermittent current  
ON: 10 minutes  
OFF: 5 minutes  
8
10  
Continuous  
current  
Continuous  
current  
Intermittent current  
Continuous current  
Corresponding to 100w  
Corresponding to 100w  
(100W : Total power consumption of inverter and compressor)  
NOTE  
While heating and electrifying the winding wire, electrifying sound may generate. It is nor abnormal.  
– 54 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. TROUBLESHOOTING  
8-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting  
<Wired remote controller type>  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+
and  
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, push pins for reset switch  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
a) The following operations are normal.  
1. Compressor does not operate.  
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup  
temperature?  
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?  
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.  
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
3. Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.  
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
• Is not defrost operation performed?  
4. ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
• Is not automatic address being set up?  
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the  
operation cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)  
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?  
b) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  
c) Are connecting cables of indoor unit and remote controller correct?  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Trouble  
Confirmation of check code display  
Check defective position and parts.  
NOTE  
For cause of a trouble, power conditions or malfunction/erroneous diagnosis of microcomputer due to outer  
noise is considered except the items to be checked. If there is any noise source, change the cables of the  
remote controller to shield cables.  
– 55 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Wireless remote controller type>  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+
and  
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, etc.  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
a) The following operations are normal.  
1. Compressor does not operate.  
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup  
temperature?  
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?  
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.  
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
3) Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.  
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
• Is not defrost operation performed?  
4) ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
• Is not forced operation performed?  
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
• Is not automatic address being set up?  
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?  
a) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  
b) Are connecting cables between indoor unit and receiving unit correct?  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the operation  
cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Confirmation of lamp display  
Check defective  
(When 4-way air discharge cassette type  
wireless remote controller is connected)  
Trouble  
position and parts.  
1) Outline of judgment  
The primary judgment to check where a trouble occurred in indoor unit or outdoor unit is performed with  
the following method.  
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of indoor unit  
(sensors of the receiving unit)  
The indoor unit monitors operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of self-diagnosis  
are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.  
– 56 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2. Troubleshooting  
8-2-1. Outline of judgment  
The primary judgment to check whether a trouble occurred in the indoor unit or outdoor unit is carried out with  
the following method.  
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of the indoor unit  
(sensors of the receiving part)  
The indoor unit monitors the operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of self-diagnosis  
are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.  
: Go off,  
: Go on,  
: Flash (0.5 sec.)  
Lamp indication  
Operation Timer Ready  
Check code  
Cause of trouble occurrence  
Power supply OFF or miswiring between receiving unit and indoor unit  
No indication at all  
E01  
E02  
E03  
E08  
E09  
E10  
Receiving error  
Receiving unit  
Miswiring or wire connection error  
Sending error  
between receiving unit and indoor unit  
Communication stop  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
Duplicated indoor unit No.  
Setup error  
Duplicated master units of remote controller  
Flash  
Communication error between CPUs on indoor unit P.C. board  
Wire connection error between indoor units, Indoor power OFF  
(Communication stop between indoor master and follower or between main  
and sub indoor twin)  
E18  
E04  
Operation Timer  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
Miswiring between indoor unit and outdoor unit or connection erorr  
(Communication stop between indoor and outdoor units)  
Flash  
Ready  
P01  
P10  
P12  
P03  
P04  
P05  
P07  
P15  
P19  
P20  
P22  
P26  
P29  
Overflow was detected.  
Protective device of indoor unit worked.  
Indoor DC fan error  
Alternate flash  
Outdoor unit discharge temp. error  
Outdoor high pressure system error  
Protective device of  
outdoor unit worked.  
1  
Negative phase detection error  
Heat sink overheat error  
Gas leak detection error  
Outdoor unit error  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
4-way valve system error (Indoor or outdoor unit judged.)  
Outdoor unit high pressure protection  
Alternate flash  
Outdoor unit: Outdoor unit error  
Protective device of  
outdoor unit worked.  
Outdoor unit: Inverter Idc operation  
Outdoor unit: Position detection error  
1  
Stopped because of error of other indoor unit in a group  
(Check codes of E03/L03/L07/L08)  
P31  
1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.  
– 57 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lamp indication  
Operation Timer  
Check code  
F01  
Cause of trouble occurrence  
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error  
Ready  
F02  
Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error  
Heat exchanger sensor (TA) error  
Indoor unit sensor error  
Alternate flash  
P10  
F04  
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error  
Temp. sensor (TE) error  
F06  
Operation Timer  
Alternate flash  
Ready  
F07  
Temp. sensor (TL) error  
F08  
Temp. sensor (TO) error  
Sensor error of outdoor unit  
1  
Temp. sensor (TS) error  
F12  
Temp. sensor (TH) error  
F13  
Temp. Sensor miswiring (TE, TS)  
F15  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
Ready  
F29  
F31  
Indoor EEPROM error  
Outdoor EEPROM error  
Simultaneous flash  
Operation Timer  
Simultaneous flash  
H01  
H02  
H03  
H04  
Compressor break down  
Compressor lock  
Outdoor compressor system error 1  
Operation Timer  
Flash  
Ready  
Current detection circuit error  
Case thermostat worked.  
PS pressure sensor error,  
}
}
Power supply, outdoor P.C. board error  
Compressor overheat, outdoor wiring error  
Outdoor unit  
low pressure protective operation  
low pressure system error  
H06  
L03  
L07  
L08  
L09  
Duplicated master indoor units  
There is indoor unit of group connection AUTO address  
in individual indoor unit.  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
* If group construction and  
Unsetting of group address  
address are not normal  
when power supply turned on,  
automatically goes to address  
setup mode.  
Missed setting  
(Unset indoor capacity)  
Simultaneous flash  
L10  
L20  
L29  
L30  
L31  
Unset model type (Service board)  
Duplicated indoor central addresses  
Outdoor unit and other error  
Outside interlock error  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
Simultaneous flash  
Negative phase error  
1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.  
– 58 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2-2. Others (Other than Check Code)  
Lamp indication  
Operation Timer Ready  
Check code  
Cause of trouble occurrence  
During test run  
Simultaneous flash  
Operation Timer Ready  
Disagreement of cool/heat  
(Automatic cool/heat setting to automatic cool/heat prohibited model, or  
setting of heating to cooling-only model)  
Alternate flash  
– 59 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2-3. Monitor Function of Remote Controller Switch  
n Calling of sensor temperature display  
<Contents>  
Each data of the remote controller, indoor unit and outdoor unit can be understood by calling the service  
monitor mode from the remote controller.  
<Procedure>  
CL  
TEST  
1
Push  
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds to  
call the service monitor mode.  
The service monitor goes on, the master indoor unit No. is  
displayed at first and then the temperature of item code 00 is  
displayed.  
TEMP  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
ò
TEMP.  
2
Push temperature set  
the item code of data to be monitored.  
buttons and then change  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
The item code list is shown below.  
2 4 1  
<Operation procedure>  
3
1 2 3 4  
Returned to usual display  
Item code  
Data name  
Room temperature  
Unit  
Item code  
Data name  
Unit  
01  
°C  
60  
61  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Coil) temperature (TE)  
Outside temperature (TO)  
°C  
°C  
(Remote controller)  
02  
03  
Indoor suction temperature (TA)  
°C  
°C  
62  
Compressor discharge temperature (TD)  
Compressor suction temperature (TS)  
Heat sink temperature (THS)  
°C  
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)  
temperature (TCJ)  
63  
°C  
65  
°C  
04  
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)  
temperature (TC)  
°C  
6A  
Operation current (× 1/10)  
A
6D  
70  
72  
73  
F1  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Coil) temperature (TL)  
Compressor operation frequency  
°C  
07  
F2  
F3  
Indoor fan revolution frequency  
Indoor fan calculated operation time  
Filter sign time  
rpm  
×100h  
×1h  
rps  
rpm  
rpm  
×100h  
Outdoor fan revolution frequency (Lower)  
Outdoor fan revolution frequency (Upper)  
Compressor calculated operation time  
F8  
Indoor discharge temperature*1  
°C  
The item codes with marks in the above table are displayed only  
on the indoor units of 4 series models and after.  
(4 series indoor units mean RAV-SM1404UT-E for example.).  
ò
UNIT LOUVER  
3
4
Push  
button to select the indoor unit to be monitored.  
Each data of the indoor unit and its outdoor units can be monitored.  
ò
TEST  
Pushing  
button returns the status to the usual display.  
1 The indoor discharge temperature of item code [F8] is the estimated value from TC or TCJ sensor.  
Use this value to check discharge temperature at test run.  
(A discharge temperature sensor is not provided to this model.)  
• The data value of each item is not the real time, but value delayed by a few seconds to ten-odd seconds.  
– 60 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2-4. Check Code List (Outdoor)  
: Go on,  
: Flash, l : Go off  
¡
¥
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED  
Sensor lamp part  
Remote  
Automatic  
reset  
Operation  
continuation  
controller  
indication  
Block indication  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
ALT  
Representative defective position  
Detection  
Explanation of error contents  
Open/Short of discharge temp. sensor was detected.  
F04  
F06  
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TE, TS, TL) error  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.  
Miswiring between TE sensor and TS sensor  
ALT  
F08  
F07  
F12  
F13  
F15  
F31  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
SIM  
Outdoor unit Outside temp. sensor (TO) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TL) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TS) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TH) error  
Outdoor unit Misconnection of temp. sensor (TE, TS)  
Outdoor unit EEPROM error  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Open/Short of outside temp. sensor was detected.  
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
×
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.  
Open/Short of suction temp. sensor was detected.  
Open/Short of heat sink temp. sensor (Board installed) was detected.  
Misconnection of outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor and suction temp. sensor was detected.  
Outdoor P.C. board part (EEPROM) error was detected.  
When reached min-Hz by current release control, short-circuited current (Idc) after  
DC excitation was detected.  
H01  
Outdoor unit Compressor break down  
×
×
¥
l
l
H02  
H03  
H04  
H06  
L10  
Outdoor unit Compressor lock  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Compressor lock was detected.  
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
l
l
l
l
¥
l
l
l
l
¥
Outdoor unit Current detection circuit error  
Outdoor unit Case thermostat operation  
Outdoor unit low pressure system error  
Outdoor unit Setting error of service P.C. board type  
Current detection circuit error  
Case thermostat operation was detected.  
Ps pressure sensor error, Low pressure protective operation  
When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type select jumper setting was inappropriate.  
SIM  
SIM  
1) Defective parts on outdoor P.C. board (MCU communication, EEPROM, TH sensor error)  
2) When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type selection was inappropriate.  
3) Other error (Heat sink abnormal overheat, gas leak, 4-way valve inverse error) was detected.  
L29  
Outdoor unit Other outdoor unit error  
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. error  
Outdoor  
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¡
¥
P03  
P04  
ALT  
ALT  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Error was detected by discharge temp. release control.  
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
Outdoor unit  
When case thermostat worked, error was detected by high release control from indoor/  
outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor. Power supply voltage error  
High pressure system error, Power supply voltage error  
P05  
P07  
P15  
P20  
P22  
P26  
P29  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
Power supply error  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Power supply voltage error  
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Outdoor unit Heat sink overheat  
Gas leak detection  
Abnormal overheat was detected by outdoor heat sink temp. sensor.  
Abnormal overheat of discharge temp. or suction temp. was detected.  
Error was detected by high release control from indoor/outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor.  
Error (Over-current, lock, etc.) was detected on outdoor fan drive circuit.  
Short-circuited protective operation of compressor drive circuit element (G-Tr /IGBT) worked.  
Position detection error of compressor motor was detected.  
Outdoor unit High pressure system error  
Outdoor unit Outdoor fan error  
Outdoor unit Inverter Idc operation  
Outdoor unit Position detection error  
No remote controller master unit  
Remote controller communication error  
Remote  
controller  
Signal was not received from indoor unit.  
Main remote controller was not set. (including 2 remote controllers)  
E01  
E02  
E03  
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
Remote  
controller  
Remote controller send error  
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.  
Regular communication error between indoor and  
remote controller  
Indoor  
No communication from remote controller and network adapter  
¡
×
×
l
¥
l
E04  
E08  
Indoor/Outdoor serial error  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Serial communication error between indoor and outdoor  
Same address as yours was detected.  
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
Duplicated indoor addresses  
²
Remote  
controller  
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master.  
(Indoor master unit stops warning and follower unit continues operation.)  
E09  
E10  
E18  
Duplicated main remote controllers  
Communication error between CPU  
×
¡
¡
×
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
Indoor  
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer  
Regular communication error between master and  
follower indoor units  
Regular communication was impossible between master and follower indoor units.  
Communication between twin master (Main unit) and follower (sub unit) was impossible.  
Indoor  
×
L03  
L07  
L08  
L09  
L30  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
Duplicated indoor master units  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
There are multiple master units in a group.  
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit  
Indoor address group was unset.  
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
²
²
²
l
l
l
l
¡
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.  
Unset indoor group address  
Unset indoor capacity  
Capacity of indoor unit was unset.  
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)  
Abnormal stop by CN80 outside error input  
Indoor  
Outdoor  
P19  
ALT  
4-way valve inverse error  
In heating operation, error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger or temp. up ofTE, TS.  
¡
×
¥
¥
l
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.  
²
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
: Go on,  
: Flash, l : Go off  
¡
¥
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED  
Sensor lamp part  
Block indication  
Remote  
controller  
indication  
Automatic  
reset  
Operation  
continuation  
Representative defective position  
Detection  
Explanation of error contents  
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TCJ) was detected.  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
ALT  
F01  
F02  
F10  
F29  
P01  
P10  
P12  
P31  
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error  
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error  
Indoor unit Room temp. sensor (TA) error  
Indoor unit Other indoor P.C. board error  
Indoor unit Indoor fan error  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
ALT  
ALT  
SIM  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TC) was detected.  
Open/Short of room temp. (TA) was detected.  
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.  
Indoor AC fan error was detected. (Fan thermal relay worked.)  
Float switch worked.  
Indoor unit Overflow detection  
Indoor unit Indoor fan error  
Indoor fan error (Over-current / Lock, etc.) was detected.  
Other indoor under condition of warning in group. E03/L07/L03/L08 warning  
Other indoor unit error  
Sub remote controller error in a group  
(Details of remote controller are displayed with unit No. Only central control side is displayed.)  
By unit with warning No.  
ALT  
Error in indoor group  
Network adapter  
Network adapter/  
Center  
Communication error of central control system signal  
Is not displayed on the remote controller  
LAN system communication error  
¡
¡
Network adapter/  
Center  
L20  
SIM  
LAN system communication error  
Duplicated indoor address of central control system communication  
¥
¡
¥
¡
¡
×
¡
There are multiple communication adapters.  
Network adapter  
There are multiple communication adapters on remote controller communication line.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error mode detected by indoor unit  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Check  
code  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
1. Check cables of remote controller and communication adapters.  
• Remote controller LCD display OFF (Disconnection)  
• Central remote controller [97] check code  
No communication from remote  
controller (including wireless) and  
communication adapter  
Stop  
Displayed when  
E03  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
The serial signal is not output from  
outdoor unit to indoor unit.  
1. Outdoor unit does not completely operate.  
• Inter-unit wire check, correction of miswiring  
• Check outdoor P.C. board. Correct wiring of P.C. board.  
• Miswiring of inter-unit wire  
Stop  
Displayed when  
E04  
• Defective serial sending circuit on  
outdoor P.C. board  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
2. When outdoor unit normally operates  
Check P.C. board (Indoor receiving / Outdoor sending).  
• Defective serial receiving circuit on  
indoor P.C. board  
E08  
L03  
Duplicated indoor unit address  
Duplicated indoor master unit  
1. Check whether remote controller connection (Group/Individual)  
was changed or not after power supply turned on  
(Finish of group construction/Address check).  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
* If group construction and address are not normal when the  
power has been turned on, the mode automatically shifts to  
address setup mode. (Resetting of address)  
Stop  
There is group wire in individual indoor  
unit.  
L07  
L08  
L09  
Unset indoor group address  
Unset indoor capacity  
Displayed when 1. Set indoor capacity (DN=11)  
error is detected  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check outside devices.  
L30  
P10  
Abnormal input of outside interlock  
error is detected  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
1. Trouble of drain pump  
Float switch operation  
Displayed when 2. Clogging of drain pump  
Stop  
• Float circuit, Disconnection,  
Coming-off, Float switch contact error  
error is detected  
3. Check float switch.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
1. Position detection error  
Displayed when 2. Over-current protective circuit of indoor fan driving unit operated.  
P12  
P19  
Indoor DC fan error  
Stop  
Stop  
error is detected  
3. Indoor fan locked.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
1. Check 4-way valve.  
4-way valve system error  
Displayed when 2. Check 2-way valve and check valve.  
• After heating operation has started,  
indoor heat exchangers temp. is  
down.  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
3. Check indoor heat exchanger (TC/TCJ).  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
1. Judge follower unit while master unit is [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08].  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Own unit stops while warning is output  
to other indoor units.  
Displayed when  
(Follower unit)  
error is detected  
(Automatic reset)  
P31  
F01  
F02  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of  
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor  
(TCJ)  
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TCJ).  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of  
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor  
(TC)  
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TC).  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of  
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor  
(TA)  
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TA).  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
F10  
F29  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Indoor EEPROM error  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor EEPROM. (including socket insertion)  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
• EEPROM access error  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Communication error between indoor  
MCU  
1. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
E10  
E18  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
• Communication error between fan  
driving MCU and main MCU  
1. Check remote controller wiring.  
2. Check indoor power supply wiring.  
3. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Regular communication error between  
indoor aster and follower units and  
between main and sub units  
Stop  
Displayed when  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
– 63 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error mode detected by outdoor unit  
The check code has been ramified from 4 series and after.  
The ramified check code is displayed only when both the indoor unit and the outdoor unit are 4 series and after.  
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM1404UT-E with RAV-SM2804AT8-E)  
When the indoor unit is 3 series and before, the conventional check code is displayed.  
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM1402CT-E and RAV-SM2804AT8-E: Outdoor unit only is 4 series.)  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Check code  
Indoor unit  
before after  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Judgment and measures  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
3 series 4 series  
1. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Disconnection, short of discharge  
temp. sensor (TD)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
F04  
F06  
F08  
F04  
F06  
F07  
F12  
F15  
F08  
Stop  
Stop  
1. Check temp. sensor (TE).  
Disconnection, short of outdoor temp.  
sensor (TE)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
1. Check temp. sensor (TL).  
Disconnection, short of outdoor temp.  
sensor (TL)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
1. Check suction temp. sensor (TS).  
Disconnection, short of suction temp.  
sensor (TS)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
1. Check temp. sensor (TE, TS).  
Miss-mounting of outdoor temp.  
sensor (TE, TS)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
1. Check outside temp. sensor (TO).  
Disconnection, short of outside temp.  
sensor (TO)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Continue  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Disconnection, short of heat sink  
temp. sensor (TH)  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
error is detected (Q201 is incorporated in TH sensor.)  
F13  
F31  
L10  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
error is detected  
Outdoor P.C. EEPROM error  
Displayed when 1. Outdoor service P.C. board  
Unset jumper of service P.C. board  
error is detected  
Check model type setting jumper wire.  
1. Check outdoor P.C. board  
Communication error between  
outdoor P.C. board MCU  
(MCC-1596, MCC-1597, MCC-1599).  
Displayed when  
Stop  
Stop  
error is detected 2. Connection check between CN802 of MCC-1599 and  
CN504 of MCC-1597, and also connection check  
L29  
P07  
between CN505 of MCC-1597 and CN851 of MCC-1596.  
Heat sink overheat error  
1. Check screw tightening between PC. Board and heat  
sink and check radiator grease (MCC-1596).  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Heat sink temp. sensor detected  
over specified temperature.  
L29  
2. Check heat sink blast path.  
1. Check gas leak, recharge  
Detection of gas leak  
2. Check full open of service valve.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Discharge temp. sensor (TD),  
Suction temp. sensor (TS) detected  
temperature over specified temp.  
3. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
P15  
P19  
Stop  
Stop  
4. Check broken pipe.  
5. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD), suction temp.  
sensor (TS).  
4-way valve inverse error  
1. Check operation of 4-way valve.  
After heating operation has started,  
indoor heat exchanger temp. lowers  
under the specified temp.  
2. Check outdoor heat exchanger (TE), suction temp.  
sensor (TS).  
Displayed when  
error is detected 3. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC).  
After heating operation has started,  
outdoor heat exchanger / suction  
temp. rises over the specified temp.  
4. Check 4-way valve coil.  
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
Compressor break down  
1. Check power supply voltage. (AC342 to 457V)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Although operation has started,  
operation frequency decreases and  
operation stops.  
2. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle  
H01  
H02  
H01  
H02  
Stop  
Stop  
Compressor lock  
1. Trouble of compressor (Lock, etc.): Replace compressor.  
Displayed when  
* Over-current detection after  
compressor start-up  
2. Wiring error of compressor (Open phase)  
error is detected  
– 64 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Check code  
Indoor unit  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Judgment and measures  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
before  
after  
3 series 4 series  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1596).  
H03  
Current detection circuit error  
Stop  
Stop  
error is detected  
(AC current detection circuit)  
H03  
P05  
1. Check open phase of 3-phase power supply.  
Open phase of 3-phase power  
supply  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
2. Black lead wire to be connected to CN03 of MCC-1596  
does not pass through T611.  
1. Check connection of Ps sensor connector.  
2. Check failure of Ps sensor.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
F23  
Ps sensor error  
Stop  
3. Check compressing power error of compressor.  
4. Check 4-way valve error.  
5. Check outdoor P.C. board error.  
1. Check service valves are fully opened.  
(Gas side, Liquid side)  
H06  
2. Check clogging of outdoor PMV. (PMV1, 2)  
3. Check SV2 circuit.  
Displayed when  
H06  
Low pressure protective operation  
Stop  
error is detected 4. Check Ps sensor error.  
5. Check clogging of indoor filter.  
6. Check clogging of refrigerant pipe.  
7. Check of outdoor fan operation. (In heating mode)  
8. Check short of refrigerant.  
Discharge temp. error  
1. Check refrigerating cycle (Gas leak)  
2. Trouble of electronic expansion valve  
3. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P03  
P03  
H04  
Stop  
Stop  
Discharge temp. (TD) over  
specified value was detected.  
1. Check case thermostat and connector.  
2. Check gas leak, recharge  
Case thermostat operation  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
3. Check full open of service valve.  
4. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
5. Check broken pipe.  
Abnormal overheat of compressor  
1. Check service valves are fully opened.  
(Gas side, Liquid side)  
2. Check of outdoor fan operation.  
3. Check motor error of outdoor fan.  
4. Check clogging of outdoor PMV. (PMV1, 2)  
5. Check clogging of heat exchanger in indoor/outdoor units.  
6. Short-circuit status of suction/discharge air in outdoor unit.  
7. Check outdoor P.C. board error.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P04  
High pressure SW system error  
Stop  
P04  
8. Check fan system error (Cause of air volume drop) at  
indoor side.  
9. Check PMV opening status in indoor unit.  
Displayed when 1. Check power supply voltage. AC342 to 457V  
error is detected  
P05  
P20  
Power supply voltage error  
Stop  
Stop  
1. Check outdoor heat exchanger sensor (TL).  
2. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC, TCJ).  
3. Check full open of service valve.  
High pressure protective operation  
• During cooling operation, outdoor  
temp. sensor (TL) detected  
temperature over specified temp.  
Displayed when 4. Check indoor/outdoor fan.  
error is detected  
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
• During heating operation, indoor  
temp. sensor (TC, TCJ) detected  
temperature over specified temp.  
6. Check clogging and short circuit of indoor/outdoor heat  
exchanger.  
7. Overcharge of refrigerant. Recharge  
1. Check lock of fan motor.  
2. Check power supply voltage between L2 and N.  
AC198 to 264V  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P22  
P22  
Outdoor fan system error  
Stop  
3. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
1. When performing operation while taking-off compressor  
wire, P26 error occurs. Check control P.C. board  
(MCC-1596).  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Short-circuit error of compressor  
driving element  
Stop  
Stop  
P26  
P29  
P26  
P29  
2. When performing operation while taking-off compressor  
wire, an error does not occur. (Compressor rare short)  
Displayed when 1. Check control P.C. board (MCC-1596).  
error is detected  
Position detection circuit error  
– 65 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error mode detected by remote controller or central controller (TCC-LINK)  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Check code  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
Power supply error of remote controller, Indoor  
EEPROM error  
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.  
2. Check remote controller.  
No communication with master indoor unit  
• Remote controller wiring is not correct.  
• Power of indoor unit is not turned on.  
• Automatic address cannot be completed.  
Not displayed at all  
(Operation on  
remote controller  
is impossible.)  
3. Check indoor power wiring.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
5. Check indoor EEPROM.  
(including socket insertion)  
Automatic address repeating phenom-  
enon generates.  
Receiving error from remote controller  
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.  
2. Check remote controller.  
No communication with master indoor unit  
Stop  
(Automatic reset)  
E01  
• Disconnection of inter-unit wire between  
remote controller and master indoor unit  
(Detected by remote controller side)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
If center exists,  
2  
3. Check indoor power wiring.  
operation continues.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Sending error of remote controller  
(Automatic reset)  
Signal send error to indoor unit  
(Detected by remote controller side)  
Displayed when 1. Check sending circuit inside of remote  
E02  
If center exists,  
error is detected  
controller.  
operation continues.  
Replace remote controller.  
1. In 2-remote controllers (including wireless),  
there are multiple main units.  
Stop  
(Sub unit  
continues operation.)  
There are multiple main remote controllers.  
(Detected by remote controller side)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
E09  
L20  
Check that there are 1 main remote  
controller and other sub remote controllers.  
1. Check setting of central control system  
network address. (Network adapter SW01)  
Duplicated indoor central addresses on  
communication of central control system  
(Detected by indoor/central controller side)  
Stop  
(Automatic reset)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Central controller  
L20  
2. Check network adapter P.C. board.  
1. Check communication wire / miswiring  
2. Check communication (U3, U4 terminals)  
3. Check network adapter P.C. board.  
3  
Communication circuit error of central  
control system  
(Detected by central controller side)  
Continues  
Displayed when  
Central controller  
(Send)  
4. Check central controller (such as central  
control remote controller, etc.)  
(By remote controller) error is detected  
C05  
(Receive)  
C06  
5. Check terminal resistance. (TCC-LINK)  
Continuation/Stop  
(According  
to each case)  
Indoor Gr sub unit error  
(Detected by central controller side)  
Displayed when Check the check code of the corresponding  
error is detected unit from remote controller.  
Central controller  
P30  
2 The check code cannot be displayed by the wired remote controller.  
(Usual operation of air conditioner becomes unavailable.)  
For the wireless models, an error is notified with indication lamp.  
3 This trouble is related to communication of remote controller (A, B), central system (TCC-LINK U3, U4), and  
[E01], [E02], [E03], [E09] or [E18] is displayed or no check display on the remote controller according to the  
contents.  
– 66 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2-5. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)  
1) This section describes the diagnostic method for each check code displayed on the remote controller.  
2) In some cases, a check code indicates multiple symptoms.  
In this case, confirm LED display on the outdoor P.C. board to narrow the contents to be confirmed.  
3) The check code on the remote controller is displayed only when the same error occurred continuously by  
multiple times while LED of the outdoor P.C. board displays even an error which occurred once.  
Therefore the display on the remote controller may differ from that of LED.  
LED display on outdoor P.C. board  
Dip switch setup  
• When turning on 1) only of SW803, the latest error  
is displayed. As the memory is stored, it can be  
confirmed even if the power supply is turned off  
once. (excluding outside temp. sensor (TO) error)  
<Latest error display>  
Only 1) of SW803 is ON.  
ON  
• When the work finished or the outdoor temp.  
sensor (TO) error was found, turn off all of SW803.  
(The error which occurs at present is displayed.)  
1
2
3
4
<Error display, which occurs at present>  
All SW803 are OFF. (Initial status)  
ON  
1
2
3
4
Display selection  
<Display 1> ó <Display 2>  
(No error)  
(Error occurred) (Push SW800)  
• When even a LED of D800 to D804 (Yellow)  
goes on, error occurrence is indicated. <Display 1>  
D805 (Green)  
D804 (Yellow)  
D803 (Yellow)  
D802 (Yellow)  
D801 (Yellow)  
D800 (Yellow)  
¡
l
l
l
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
• If pushing the button switch SW800 for 1 second  
under the above condition, the yellow LED is  
displayed with flashing. <Display 2>  
• When pushing SW800 for 1 second again, the  
status returns to <Display 1>.  
(Example of discharge temp. sensor error)  
: Go off, : Go on, : Flash  
• The error contents can be confirmed by combining  
<Display 1> and <Display 2>.  
¡
¥
l
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[E04]  
[Indoor/Outdoor communication error]  
NO  
Is setting of group address  
of remote controller correct?  
Check Item code [14].  
YES  
NO  
Are inner wiring and  
inter-unit cables (1, 2, 3) normal?  
Correct wiring  
and inter-unit cable.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Are connection of CN01 of MCC-1599 and  
wiring of terminal blocks (1, 2, 3) normal?  
Correct wiring of connectors  
and terminal blocks.  
YES  
Does D502 (Orange LED) flash after  
power supply is turned on again?  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
– 67 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[F04]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN603 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TD sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
[F06]  
• There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.  
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error, Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error,  
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error, Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS)  
<Display 1> <Display 2> Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN601 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TE sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error] Refer to [F07] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
¥
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error] Refer to [F12] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
l
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)] Refer to [F15] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
[F07]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
¥
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN604 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TL sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
– 68 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[F08]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Outside air temp. sensor (TO) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
l
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN602 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TO sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
[F12]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
l
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN600 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TS sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
[F13]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
¥
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
[F15]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is mounting status of  
TE and TS sensors normal?  
Correct sensor mounting.  
YES  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN600 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TS sensor normal?  
YES  
Is CN601 connection normal?  
Correct connector.  
Is resistance value of TE sensor normal?  
Sensor error Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
– 69 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[F23]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [PS sensor error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
¥
NO  
Is connector of  
Ps sensor correctly connected?  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
Connector: CN606, White  
NO  
Are the output current characteristics  
Sensor error  
of Ps sensor normal?  
YES  
Pressure by pressure gauge (Check joint)  
Pressure display on LED display  
Output power of I/F (CDB) P.C. board  
If  
and  
,
and  
are different,  
ꢁ ꢀ  
an error of the pressure sensor is considered.  
If  
and  
are different, check I/F P.C. board.  
Does not refrigerant bypass  
from discharge port to suction port  
of 4-way valve?  
NO  
Check compressor.  
YES  
Check 4-way valve.  
[F31]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
[H01]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor break down]  
¡
¡
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
l
l
l
¥
NO  
Is power supply voltage normal?  
AC342 to 457V  
Correct power supply line.  
YES  
Is wire connection normal?  
Compressor lead  
(Board side, Compressor side),  
Reactor lead, Power supply lead  
NO  
Check wire connection  
and correct it.  
YES  
YES  
Is it not abnormal overload?  
NO  
Correct and clear the cause.  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1596).  
Defect Replace  
– 70 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[H02]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor lock]  
¡
¡
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
NO  
NO  
Is power supply voltage normal?  
AC342 to 457V  
Correct power supply line.  
YES  
Is wire connection normal?  
Compressor lead  
(Board side, Compressor side),  
Reactor lead, Power supply lead  
Check wire connection  
and correct it.  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Is compressor normal?  
NO  
Defect Replace  
Is there no refrigerant stagnation?  
YES  
Compressor lock Replace  
NO  
Check TE, TS sensors and PMV.  
Does PMV normally operate?  
YES  
Defect Replace  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1596).  
Defect Replace  
[H03]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Current detection circuit error]  
¡
¡
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
l
l
¥
¥
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1596).  
Defect Replace  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error (Vdc)] Refer to [P05] column.  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
[H04]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation]  
¡
¡
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
NO  
NO  
NO  
Are CN609 connection  
and case thermostat normal?  
Correct connector.  
Case thermostat error Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Is cooling/heating operation available  
when short-circuiting case thermostat?  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Repair defectives position.  
Recharge refrigerant.  
Is there no gas leak?  
Is it not refrigerant shortage?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Is valve fully opened?  
YES  
Open valve fully.  
Correct defective position.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV normal?  
YES  
Check crushed or broken pipe.  
Defect Correct and Replace  
– 71 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[H06]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Low pressure protective operation]  
¡
¡
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
Are gas pipe, liquid pipe  
and service valve of the  
outdoor unit fully opened?  
NO  
NO  
Open the service valve fully.  
Replace low pressure sensor.  
YES  
Are the pressure  
sensor characteristics of  
low pressure normal?  
YES  
Pressure by pressure gauge (Check joint)  
Pressure indication by LED  
Output power of I/F (CDB) P.C. board  
If  
and  
,
and  
are different,  
ꢁ ꢀ  
an error of the pressure sensor is considered.  
If and are different, check P.C. board.  
NO  
Is SV2 circuit normal?  
Correct SV2 circuit.  
YES  
Check miss-wiring, wrong installation and connection of connector.  
Isn’t any indoor unit  
which has different refrigerant  
system connected?  
YES  
Correct wiring to regular wiring.  
NO  
(Using miss-wiring check function of the outdoor unit, check them.)  
In cooling season, go to  
In heating season, go to  
A
B
.
.
A
Cooling  
Are parts related to the  
indoor fan motor normal?  
1. Connection of connector  
2. Capacitor  
NO  
NO  
Does cooling  
Repair the  
indoor fan normally operate?  
defective position.  
3. Motor 4. Fan  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Is there clogging of indoor filter  
or heat exchanger?  
Cleaning  
Check indoor P.C. board  
Defective Replace  
NO  
NO  
Refrigerant shortage, clogging  
or pipe breakage is considered.  
Are connection of connectors  
and coils normal?  
Repair the  
defective position.  
YES  
YES  
Replace PMV  
with new one.  
Is blocking found in entire valve?  
B
Heating  
NO  
Is indoor fan  
NO  
NO  
system normal?  
Does heating outdoor fan  
normally operate?  
Repair the  
defective position.  
· Fan breakage  
· Fan coming-off  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Is there clogging of  
outdoor heat exchanger?  
Cleaning  
Check outdoor P.C. board  
Defective Replace  
NO  
NO  
Is outdoor PMV normal?  
YES  
Shortage of  
refrigerant/blocking/pipe breakage  
[L10]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type]: Only when service P.C. board is used  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
Cut jumper line according  
to the explanation sheet packaged  
with the service P.C. board.  
– 72 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[L29]  
There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.  
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.  
Communication error between MCU, Heat sing temp. sensor (TH) error,  
EEPROM error, Unset model type, Heat sink overheat error, Gas leak detection,  
4-way valve inverse error  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Communication error between MCU]  
1. Connection check between CN802 of MCC-1599 and CN504 of MCC-1597  
and also connection check between CN505 of MCC-1597 and CN851 of  
MCC-1596.  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
¥
2. Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1596, MCC-1597, MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error] Refer to [F13] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
¥
<Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error] Refer to [F31] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type] Refer to [L10] column.  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error] Refer to [P07] column.  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
¥
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection] Refer to [P15] column.  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve inverse error] Refer to [P19] column.  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
¥
l
l
¥
¥
– 73 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P03]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. error]  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
l
l
¥
¥
NO  
Repair defective position.  
Recharge refrigerant.  
Is there no gas leak?  
Is refrigerant charge amount adequate?  
YES  
NO  
Repair defective position.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV normal?  
YES  
YES  
Correct and clear the cause.  
Is it not abnormal overload?  
NO  
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN603 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TD sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
[P04]  
There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.  
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is. (1) high-pressure SW system error,  
(2) power supply error (Vdc), (3) high-pressure protective operation, (4) case thermo operation.  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure SW system error]  
Power supply error (Vdc), High pressure protective operation, Case thermostat  
operation.  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
NO  
NO  
Doesn’t high pressure switch  
operate?  
Wiring check,  
Correct.  
Is circuit wiring normal?  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Are parts of  
Parts check  
high pressure switch normal?  
Defective Replace  
YES  
Open service valve fully.  
Is service valve fully opened?  
YES  
Reset the power supply and  
then do a trial operation according  
to the season.  
B Cooling operation  
C Heating operation  
Check Comp. IPDU PC board  
Defective Replace  
B Cooling operation.  
NO  
NO  
Does cooling outdoor fan  
normally operate?  
Is there no fan breakage  
or coming-off?  
YES  
YES  
Repair defective position.  
Connection of connectors,  
Fan IPDU, Fan motor, Wiring.  
Is there any element  
which blocks heat exchanger  
of the outdoor unit?  
YES  
Elimination of  
blocking element  
Clogging of heat exchanger  
Short circuit  
NO  
Overcharge of refrigerant/  
Clogging/Pipe breakage/  
Abnormal overload  
– 74 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P04]  
C
Heating operation  
NO  
NO  
Are connections of  
connectors,capacitors  
and fan motor normal?  
Does the heating indoor fan  
normally operate?  
YES  
YES  
Is there any element which  
YES  
blocks indoor heat exchanger?  
Elimination of  
blocking element  
Repair  
defective position.  
Filter clogging  
Clogging of heat exchanger  
Short circuit  
NO  
NO  
Are characteristics  
of TC and TCJ sensor  
resistance value normal?  
Clogging by refrigerant  
overcharge/Pipe breakage/  
Abnormal overload  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board  
Defective Replace  
Replace  
TC or TCJ sensor.  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation] Refer to [H04] column.  
¡
¡
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error (Vdc)] Refer to [P05] column.  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation] Refer to [P20] column.  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
– 75 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P05]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error (Voltage error)]  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
YES  
YES  
Is there no open phase  
of the power supply?  
Correct wiring.  
NO  
Is there no down or up  
of power supply voltage?  
(AC342 to 457V)  
Confirm electric construction, etc.  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1600).  
Defect Replace  
[P07]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error]  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
¥
Is there no loosening of  
YES  
NO  
Apply radiation grease  
to objective part.  
screws of motor drive element of  
outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1596) Q201?  
Did not forget to apply radiation grease  
to rear side of Q201?  
Retightening of screws.  
NO  
Is not the ventilation flue  
of the heat sink blocked?  
Is not the fan blocked?  
(Short-circuit, etc.)  
Remove blocking matter.  
Correct short-circuit.  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1596).  
Defect Replace  
[P15]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection]  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
NO  
Is there no gas leak?  
Repair defective position.  
Recharge refrigerant.  
Is refrigerant charge amount adequate?  
YES  
NO  
Correct defective position.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV normal?  
YES  
NO  
Open valve fully.  
Is valve fully opened?  
YES  
YES  
Is there no crushed pipe?  
NO  
Correct and replace piping.  
Error  
Check temp. sensor.  
TD sensor CN603, TS sensor CN600  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
OK  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1599).  
Defect Replace  
[P19]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve inverse error]  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
¥
l
l
¥
¥
Temperature sensor check  
TE sensor CN601  
Is operation of  
YES  
4-way valve normal?  
TS sensor CN600  
(Check pipe temp., etc. in  
cooling/heating operation.)  
Indoor TC sensor  
Defect Correct and repair  
NO  
NO  
Is power supplied  
to 4-way valve coil?  
Replace coil of 4-way valve.  
YES  
Error  
Check operation of  
outdoor I/F (CDB) P.C. board.  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect replace  
OK  
Check 4-way valve.  
Defect Replace  
– 76 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P20]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation]  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
NO  
Is valve fully opened?  
YES  
Open valve fully.  
Reset the power supply  
and then perform test run  
matching to the season.  
Cooling season  
Cooling operation  
Heating season  
Heating operation  
Is there no problem  
on outdoor TL sensor?  
(Measurement of resistance value)  
NO  
YES  
Replace sensor.  
NO  
Is there no crack or  
loosening of outdoor fan?  
YES  
Check outdoor fan.  
Defect Replace, retightening  
NO  
Does not the outdoor fan  
perform abnormal operation?  
YES  
Check the same items as  
[P22] error.  
Is there no element  
which interfere heat exchange  
of outdoor unit?  
YES  
Clogging of heat exchanger  
Short circuit  
NO  
Eliminate interfering element.  
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,  
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.  
Defect Correct defective position.  
NO  
NO  
Does indoor fan  
normally operate?  
Are indoor fan motor  
and connector normal?  
YES  
YES  
Repair defective position.  
Are resistance values  
of indoor TC and TCJ  
sensors normal?  
NO  
Replace  
sensor.  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
Is there no element which  
interfere heat exchange of indoor unit?  
Clogging of filter  
YES  
Eliminate interfering element.  
Clogging of heat exchanger  
Short circuit  
NO  
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,  
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.  
Defect Correct defective position.  
– 77 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P22]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Fan system error]  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
l
NO  
Is there no problem on power supply voltage?  
(342 to 457V)  
Check wiring construction.  
Ask repair of power supply.  
YES  
Does the fan rotate without trouble when rotating  
shaft of fan motor with hands during power-OFF?  
Is there no problem on coil resistance of fan motor?  
Between red and white lead wire : 12 to 20  
Between white and black lead wire : 12 to 20Ω  
Between black and red lead wire : 12 to 20Ω  
YES  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1597).  
Replace fan motor.  
Defect Replace  
Single operation check for outdoor fan  
1) Set SW804 of Dip switch as the following figure and then push SW801 for  
approx. 1 second to check single operation of outdoor fan. Use this method to  
check which fan, upper or lower fan, has a trouble.  
• When pushing SW801 for 1 second again or 2 minutes passed, the fan stops.  
2) After check, turn off all Dip switch  
Outdoor fan single operation  
SW804.  
SW804  
SW801  
ON  
Push  
1
2
3
4
[P26]  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Short-circuit of compressor drive element]  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
¥
l
Is there no problem on connection  
of compressor lead or reactor?  
(Check referring to Wiring diagram.)  
NO  
Correct wiring.  
YES  
NO  
The same error does not occur in  
operation without compressor lead.  
Replace outdoor P.C. board.  
YES  
Check compressor. (Rear short, etc.)  
Defect Replace  
[P29]  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Position detection circuit error]  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
¥
Check outdoor P.C. board (MCC-1596).  
Defect Replace  
No code  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Other error] Compressor disorder due to sudden change of load, etc.  
Although the display of outdoor LED outputs, the unit automatically restarts  
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
and error is not determined.  
LED display also may output due to negative phase of compressor or wire  
coming-off.  
– 78 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Temperature sensor  
Temperature – Resistance value characteristic table  
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors  
TD,TL sensors  
Representative value  
Representative value  
Resistance value (k)  
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)  
Resistance value (k)  
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)  
Temperature  
Temperature  
(°C)  
(°C)  
0
10  
20  
25  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
32.33  
19.63  
12.23  
9.75  
33.80  
20.35  
12.59  
10.00  
7.990  
5.192  
3.451  
2.343  
1.623  
1.146  
0.8237  
0.6023  
35.30  
21.09  
12.95  
10.25  
8.218  
5.375  
3.594  
2.454  
1.709  
1.213  
0.8761  
0.6434  
0
10  
20  
25  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
150.5  
92.76  
58.61  
47.01  
37.93  
25.12  
17.00  
11.74  
8.269  
5.925  
4.321  
3.205  
161.3  
99.05  
62.36  
49.93  
40.22  
26.55  
17.92  
12.34  
8.668  
6.195  
4.507  
3.336  
172.7  
105.6  
66.26  
52.97  
42.59  
28.03  
18.86  
12.95  
9.074  
6.470  
4.696  
3.468  
7.764  
5.013  
3.312  
2.236  
1.540  
1.082  
0.7740  
0.5634  
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors  
Low pressure sensor  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
3.5  
2.0  
0.5  
0
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100  
0.49  
0.98  
Temperature (˚C)  
Pressure (MPa)  
Pressure sensor I/O wire  
connecting table  
TD,TL sensors  
Pin No. Input/output name Lead wire  
200  
150  
100  
50  
20  
1
2
3
4
OUTPUT  
GND  
White  
Black  
Red  
15  
10  
5
DC5V  
0
0
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100  
Temperature (˚C)  
As TH sensor (Outdoor unit heat sink temp. sensor) is incorporated in the outdoor control P.C. board, the resistance  
value cannot be measured.  
– 79 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS  
9-1. Calling of Error History  
<Contents>  
The error contents in the past can be called.  
<Procedure>  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
SET  
TEST  
1
Push  
+
buttons simultaneously for  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
4 seconds or more to call the service check mode.  
Service Check goes on, the CODE No. 01 is displayed, and then  
the content of the latest alarm is displayed.The number and error  
contents of the indoor unit in which an error occurred are dis-  
played.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
2
3
In order to monitor another error history, push the set  
temperature  
/
buttons to change the error  
2 3 1  
history No. (CODE No.).  
CODE No. 01 (Latest) CODE No. 04 (Old)  
NOTE : 4 error histories are stored in memory.  
<Operation procedure>  
TEST  
1 2 3  
Pushing  
button returns the display to usual display.  
REQUIREMENT  
Returned to usual display  
CL  
Do not push  
button, otherwise all the error histories of the indoor  
unit are deleted.  
9-2. Group Control Operation  
In a group control, operation of maximum 8 indoor units can be controlled by a remote controller.  
The indoor unit connected with outdoor unit (Individual/Master of twin) controls room temperature according to  
setting on the remote controller.  
<System example>  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Master  
2-1  
1-1  
3-1  
4-1  
7-1  
Max. 8 units  
Remote controller  
1. Display range on remote controller  
The setup range (Operation mode/Air volume select/Setup temp) of the indoor unit which was set to the  
master unit is reflected on the remote controller.  
2. Address setup  
Turn on power of the indoor unit to be controlled in a group within 3 minutes after setting of automatic  
address. If power of the indoor unit is not turned on within 3 minutes (completion of automatic address  
setting), the system is rebooted and the automatic address setting will be judged again.  
1) Connect 3 In/Out cables surely.  
2) Check line address/indoor address/group address of the unit one by one.  
3) The unit No. (line/indoor gout address) which have been set once keep the present status as a rule if the  
unit No. is not duplicated with one of another unit.  
– 80 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Indoor unit power-ON sequence  
Power ON  
• The unit without power feed waits entirely  
Waiting status is released by system start  
• Reboot when power is fed on the way  
<By feed unit>  
<Automatic  
address judgment>  
Not normal  
NO  
3 minutes elapse  
Gr construction check  
YES  
Normal  
Gr normal  
1) There is no duplicated indoor unit address.  
2) There is no invalid indoor unit address.  
3) Individual unit and master/follower units  
are not intermingled.  
4) Only a unit for individual.  
5) A master indoor unit and 1 or more  
follower indoor units for Gr.  
System start  
Automatic address starts.  
(Approx. 1 minute up to finish)  
<Initial communication>  
Outdoor model distinction (10 seconds) (Indoor unit)  
Twin Master/follower distinction (Indoor unit)  
Gr construction, louver information (Remote controller)  
<Cautions at test run>  
• Power supply/Indoor/Outdoor serial and Gr wiring: OK  
• Powers of all indoor units are turned on within 3 minutes.  
• Reception time for remote controller operation  
(After power supply was turned on)  
1) When address is OK : Approx. 50 seconds  
2) In AUTO address  
: Approx. 4 to 5 minutes  
Remote controller operation is available.  
(Approx. 50 seconds after power-ON)  
<Usual regular  
communication>  
Regular communication between indoor units (Every 30 seconds) (Master/Follower)  
Regular communication on the identical pipe (every 30 seconds) (Twin Master/Follower)  
(When the above status changes, immediately communicates.)  
(Repetition)  
• In a group operation, if the indoor unit which was fed power after judgment of automatic address cannot  
receive regular communication from the master unit and regular communication on identical pipe within  
120 seconds after power was turned on, it reboots (system reset).  
The operation starts from judgment of automatic address (Gr construction check) again.  
(If the address of the master unit was determined in the previous time, the power fed to the master unit and  
reboot works, the master unit may change though the indoor unit line address is not changed.)  
– 81 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-3. Outdoor Unit  
9-3-1. Various Setting on Outdoor Unit (Existing piping, Power save, Cooling-only, etc.)  
The following settings are available by DIP switch setup and jumper line setup.  
Function  
Existing  
Set position  
Control contents  
Turn the switch to ON when Ø19.1 is used for the existing pipe.  
piping setup  
In this case, the heating capacity may lower according to outside  
temp. and indoor temp. in heating operation.  
SW802  
ON  
1
Power save  
setup  
Turn the switch to ON when using the power save function.  
2
3
4
The control to lower the compressor frequency (Approx. –10%) is  
performed by indoor heat exchanger temp. in heating operation.  
Existing piping setup  
Power save setup  
Snow-proof fan control  
When snow enters from clearance of the fan guard or heat  
exchanger into blast path and it is accumulated, the control to  
prevent generation of motor lock is validated.  
Snow-proof  
fan control  
all are OFF at shipment.  
When outside temp. is below 0°C though the compressor stops,  
the outdoor fan operates with W5.  
The defrost interval is cut to shorten it than the standard status.  
Defrost  
time change  
J805, J806  
For contents of control and cutting method, refer to Section  
7-4. Defrost control.  
When it is needed to lower the maximum value of the compressor  
frequency, cut the jumper line. Max. frequency at cooling/heating  
is lowered.  
In this case the Max. capacity decreases.  
Max. frequency of compressor  
Max. frequency  
change  
J807  
RAV-SM224  
RAV-SM280  
Model  
COOL  
HEAT  
74.4  
COOL  
HEAT  
96.0  
Standard status  
When J807 is cut  
78.0  
66.6  
91.2  
76.8  
66.6  
76.8  
When using the air conditioner as a cooling-only conditioner, cut  
the jumper line. (An air conditioner can be changed to cooling-only  
conditioner by “0F” of DN code on the remote controller.)  
Cooling-only  
setup  
J808  
– 82 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-3-2. Service Support Function (LED Display, Switch Operation)  
1. Outline  
A various setup and operation check can be performed by DIP switches at 3 positions  
(SW802, SW803, SW804) and the pushdown button switches (SW800, SW801) at 2 positions.  
Operation part  
Part No.  
SW800  
SW803  
SW801  
SW804  
SW802  
Specifications  
Pushdown button switch  
DIP switch  
Operation contents  
Exchanges the displayed contents of LED (D800 to D804) on the outdoor  
control P.C. board.  
Pushdown button switch  
DIP switch  
Performs the specific operation to check maintenance.  
Performs various initial settings. (Refer to 9-3-1.)  
DIP switch  
Display part  
Part No.  
Specifications  
Operation contents  
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display  
(Receive signal from indoor signal)  
D502  
Orange LED  
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display  
(Send signal from outdoor signal)  
D503  
Green LED  
Yellow LED  
Error display  
When all SW803 are OFF, or when any of D800 to D804 goes on, LED  
displays that the outdoor controller detects an error.  
D800 to D804  
When status of SW803 is other than OFF, various indications are displayed.  
Power-ON display  
When the power of the outdoor unit is turned on, LED goes on.  
When SW801 and SW804 operate the specific operation, LED flashes.  
D805  
Green LED  
All LED are colorless when it goes off.  
ON  
1
ON  
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
Enlarged view of  
LEDs  
SW804  
SW805  
ON  
ON  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
D805  
D804  
D803  
D802  
D801  
D800  
SW802  
SW803  
SW800 SW801 SW806  
LED  
D805  
D804  
D803  
D802  
D801  
D800  
D502  
D503  
– 83 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-3-3. Others  
1. Selection of LED display (SW800, SW803 operation)  
1) Display selection list  
The displayed contents of LED D800 to D804 on the outdoor control P.C. board can be exchanged by  
operation of SW803.  
Switch  
Function / Contents  
Refer  
Error display (Error generating at present)  
Error generating at present is displayed.  
Refer to  
2)  
SW803  
ON  
This switch goes off when an error does not generate.  
1
2
3
4
Error display (The latest error: Latest error including present)  
Refer to  
2)  
After error status was cleared, the error which generated before  
can be confirmed by this setting. (Reconfirmation is available  
even if power supply was turned off once.)  
SW803  
ON  
1
• If an error generates at present, the same contents as those of  
error which is generating at present are displayed.  
2
3
4
• Only error of TO sensor is not displayed by this setting.  
(Confirm it by setting of error which is generating at present.)  
Temperature sensor display  
The detected value of temperature sensor is displayed.  
Refer to  
3)  
TD  
SW803  
TE  
SW803  
TS  
SW803  
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
2
3
4
4
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
4
4
TO  
SW803  
TL  
SW803  
TH  
SW803  
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
2
3
2
3
4
4
2
3
TA  
SW803  
TC  
SW803  
TCJ  
SW803  
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
Current display  
Refer to  
3)  
SW803  
The current value which flows in the outdoor unit is displayed.  
ON  
1
2
3
4
4
4
4
Compressor operation frequency display  
The operation frequency of the compressor is displayed.  
Refer to  
3)  
SW803  
ON  
1
2
3
PMV opening display  
The opening of PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) is displayed.  
Refer to  
3)  
SW803  
ON  
1
2
3
Ps sensor display  
Detected Ps sensor is displayed.  
Refer to  
3)  
SW803  
ON  
1
2
3
– 84 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) Error display  
The error which is generating at present and the latest error (Latest error information including present)  
can be confirmed by lighting LED D800 toD804 on the outdoor control P.C. board.  
a) When all DIP switch SW803 are OFF, the status of error which is generating at present is displayed.  
b) <1> only of DIP switch SW803 is turned on, the error which generated before  
(Latest error information including present) is displayed.a)  
c) If there is an error, any of LED D800 to D804 goes on. (Display 1)  
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW800 for approx. 1 second, the display is exchanged.  
(Display 2)  
e) When pushing SW800 again or after 2 minutes, the status returns to that of Display  
.

(Legend)  
Present error  
SW803  
Latest error  
SW803  
¥
¡
l
D800  
l
D801  
l
D803  
l
D804  
ON  
ON  
D802  
D805  
(Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Green)  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
: Go on, : Flash  
¥
l : Go off,  
¡
Display 1)  
Display 2)  
Wired remote controller  
Error code  
Error contents  
(Initial display) (SW800 operation)  
Normal  
F04  
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll  
lllll  
¥
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error  
Outside temp. sensor (TO) error  
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error  
Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error  
Heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS) miswiring  
Ps sensor error  
ll ll  
F06  
¥¥  
l
¥¥¥  
ll  
F06, F07  
F08  
ll  
¥ ¡  
lll l  
¥¥ ¡  
ll l  
F06, F12  
F13, L29  
F06, F15  
F23, H06  
F31, L29  
H01  
¡¡  
¡¡  
ll  
¥ ¥¥ ¡  
l l  
¥¥¥¥ ¡  
l
¥¥¥ ¥¡  
l
¥¥¥¥¥¡  
EEPROM error  
Compressor break down  
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
llll  
Compressor lock  
H02  
¥
l lll  
¥¥  
lll  
Current detection circuit error  
Case thermostat operation  
Low pressure protective operation  
Model unset  
H03  
¡ ¡¡  
ll l  
H04, P04  
H06  
¥
ll ll  
l¥¥ll¡  
¥¥  
L10, L29  
L29  
¡
ll  
¥ ¥¥¥¡  
l
Communication error between MCU  
Other error (Compressor disorder, etc.)  
Discharge temp. error  
¡¡ ¡¡  
l
l
l
Error is not determined.  
P03  
¥¥¥¥¥¡  
¥¥  
¡
¡
¡
¡
lll  
High pressure SW system error  
Power supply error  
P04  
¥
ll ll  
P04, P05  
P07, L29  
P15, L29  
P19, L29  
P04, P20  
P22  
¥ ¥  
l ll  
Heat sink overheat error  
¥¥¥  
ll  
Gas leak detection  
¥¥¥¥ ¡  
l
¥¡  
¡¡¡ ¡¡  
l
4-way valve reverse error  
¥¥  
ll  
¥ ¥¡  
High pressure protective operation  
Fan system error  
ll l  
¥¥ ¥¡  
l
l l  
l
¥ ¥¥¡  
Driving element short-circuit  
Position detection circuit erro  
P26  
P29  
¥ ¥¥¥¡  
l
As the error code displayed on the wired remote controller may differ according to type of indoor model, multiple  
codes are described.  
– 85 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3) Sensor, current, compressor operation frequency, PMV opening display  
The values detected by the controller, such as temperature sensor or current value are simply confirmed.  
(Legend)  
¥
¡
l
D800  
l
D801  
l
D803  
l
D804  
D802  
D805  
: Go on  
l : Go off,  
¡
(Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Green)  
Compressor  
operation  
frequency  
(rpm)  
Temperature sensor (°C)  
PMV  
Current  
(A)  
Pressure  
(kg/cm²G)  
TD  
SW803  
TE  
SW803  
TS  
SW803  
opening  
(Pulse)  
Item  
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
setup  
2
3
4
4
4
2
3
4
4
4
2
3
4
4
4
TO  
SW803  
TL  
SW803  
TH  
SW803  
SW803  
SW803  
ON  
SW803  
ON  
SW803  
ON  
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
2
3
2
3
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
TA  
SW803  
TC  
SW803  
TCJ  
SW803  
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
LED  
display  
2
3
2
3
2
3
0 to 0.9  
1 to 1.9  
0 to 4  
5 to 9  
0 to 19  
–2  
–1  
0
Below –25  
–25 to –21  
–20 to –16  
–15 to –11  
–10 to – 5  
–5 to –1  
0 to 4  
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll  
20 to 39  
40 to 59  
¡
llll  
¡
2 to 2.9  
10 to 14  
15 to 19  
20 to 24  
25 to 29  
30 to 34  
35 to 39  
40 to 44  
45 to 49  
50 to 54  
55 to 59  
60 to 64  
65 to 69  
70 to 74  
75 to 79  
80 to 84  
85 to 89  
80 to 84  
95 to 99  
l lll  
3 to 3.9  
60 to 79  
1
¡¡  
lll  
4 to 4.9  
80 to 99  
2
¡
ll ll  
5 to 5.9  
100 to 119  
120 to 139  
140 to 159  
160 to 179  
180 to 199  
200 to 219  
220 to 239  
240 to 259  
260 to 279  
280 to 299  
300 to 319  
320 to 339  
340 to 359  
360 to 379  
380 to 399  
3
¡ ¡  
l ll  
6 to 6.9  
4
¡¡  
l
¡¡¡  
ll  
ll  
7 to 7.9  
5
5 to 9  
8 to 8.9  
6
10 to 14  
15 to 19  
20 to 24  
25 to 29  
30 to 34  
35 to 39  
40 to 44  
45 to 49  
50 to 54  
55 to 59  
60 to 64  
65 to 69  
70 to 74  
75 to 79  
80 to 84  
85 to 89  
90 to 94  
95 to 99  
100 to 104  
105 to 109  
110 to 114  
115 to 119  
Over 120  
¡ ¡  
lll l  
¡
9 to 9.9  
7
¡ ¡  
ll l  
¡ ¡ ¡  
l l l  
10 to 10.9  
11 to 11.9  
12 to 12.9  
13 to 13.9  
14 to 14.9  
15 to 15.9  
16 to 16.9  
17 to 17.9  
18 to 18.9  
19 to 19.9  
8
9
¡¡ ¡ ¡  
l l  
¡¡ ¡  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
ll  
l
¡ ¡¡ ¡  
l
¡¡¡ ¡  
l
l
¡¡¡¡ ¡  
l
l
¡¡  
¡¡  
¡¡  
¡¡  
llll  
¡
lll  
¡
l ll  
¡¡  
ll  
20 to 20.9 100 to 104 400 to 419  
21 to 21.9 105 to 109 420 to 439  
22 to 22.9 110 to 114 440 to 459  
23 to 23.9 115 to 119 460 to 479  
24 to 24.9 120 to 124 480 to 499  
¡ ¡¡  
ll l  
¡ ¡ ¡¡  
l l  
¡¡ ¡¡  
l
¡¡¡ ¡¡  
l
l
¡¡¡  
lll  
¡
25 to 25.9 125 to 129  
26 to 26.9 130 to 134  
27 to 27.9 135 to 139  
28 to 28.9 140 to 144  
29 to 29.9 145 to 149  
30 to 30.9 150 to 154  
500  
¡¡¡  
ll  
¡ ¡¡¡  
l l  
¡¡ ¡¡¡  
l
¡¡¡¡  
ll  
¡ ¡¡¡¡  
l
¡¡¡¡¡  
l
¡¡¡¡¡¡  
Over 31  
Over 155  
29 or more  
Sensor error, unconnected  
As TD, TL and TH are sensors for high temperature, there is error at normal temperature or below position.  
For current value, the current for the outdoor unit only is displayed.  
– 86 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4) Specific operation for maintenance check (SW801, SW804)  
The following specific operations for the maintenance check are performed by operation of SW801 or  
SW804.  
a) Select DIP switch SW804. (See table below)  
b) Push the pushdown button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second.  
c) The following functions start. While each function starts, LED D805 (Green) flashes.  
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW801 again for approx. 1 second, when selecting DIP  
switch SW804 or when the specified time of each function elapsed, each function stops and  
LED D805 (Green) returns to the continuous lighting.  
<Specific operation>  
SW804  
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed  
Refrigerant recovery operation  
SW804  
The outdoor unit performs cooling operation.  
The indoor unit does not work by this operation alone.  
Therefore operate the fan beforehand.  
ON  
1
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Indoor cooling test run demand  
The cooling test run is performed. (Note 1)  
SW804  
ON  
1
2
3
Indoor heating test run demand  
The heating test run is performed. (Note 1)  
SW804  
ON  
1
2
3
Fan motor forced operation  
Drive the fan motor forcedly.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed,  
the operation returns to the normal control.  
SW804  
ON  
1
2
3
PMV full open operation  
Open PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed,  
the operation returns to the normal control.  
SW804  
[NOTE]  
Although these operations can  
be performed even during  
operation, basically perform  
operation while the unit stops.  
ON  
1
2
3
PMV full close operation  
Close PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed,  
the operation returns to the normal control.  
If performing this operation  
during driving the unit, it is  
dangerous because the  
SW804  
ON  
1
pressure may change suddenly.  
2
3
PMV middle opening operation  
Set PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) to middle opening.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed,  
the operation returns to the normal control.  
SW804  
ON  
1
2
3
Note 1) Indoor cooling test run demand / Indoor heating test run demand  
Only when combining with the following indoor unit, cooling/heating operation can be performed from the  
outdoor unit.  
Test run is available: Indoor unit of 4 series and after (RAV-SM  
4UT-E etc.)  
∗∗∗  
Test run is unavailable: Indoor units other than the above-mentioned indoor units, or indoor units other  
than above-mentioned indoor units are included in the twin, triple, double twin connection.  
Note 2) The forced test run by this setting cannot be cleared on the indoor remote controller.  
Be sure to clear the test run by operation of the outdoor unit. (Push SW801 again for 1 second.)  
– 87 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SW804  
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed  
4-way valve relay operation (For RY700, CN70 check)  
SW804  
Turn on 4-way valve power relay (RY700).  
ON  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed,  
the operation returns to the normal control.  
1
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
SV valve relay operation (For RY702, CN702 check)  
Turn on SV valve relay (RY702).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes  
elapsed, the operation returns to the normal control.  
SW804  
ON  
1
[CAUTION]  
Although these operations can  
be performed even during  
operation, basically perform  
operation while the unit stops.  
2
3
Heater output relay operation  
(For check RY703, CN703 check)  
Turn on relay for option heater (RY703).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes  
elapsed, the operation returns to the normal control.  
SW804  
If performing this operation  
during driving the unit, it is  
dangerous because the  
ON  
1
2
3
pressure may change suddenly.  
Outside output relay operation (RY704, CN704)  
Turn on relay for outside output (RY704).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes  
elapsed, the operation returns to the normal control.  
SW804  
ON  
1
2
3
Forced start command  
The indoor unit connected to the system is forcedly started.  
(The indoor unit starts operation by setting of the operation mode on the remote controller.)  
SW804  
ON  
1
2
3
Forced stop command  
The indoor unit connected to the system is forcedly stopped.  
SW804  
ON  
1
2
3
Relay operation change for outside output  
SW804  
ON  
1
[CAUTION]  
Do not use this setting.  
2
3
– 88 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. ADDRESS SETUP  
10-1. Address Setup Procedure  
When an outdoor unit and an indoor unit are connected, or when an outdoor unit is connected to each indoor  
unit respectively in the group operation even if multiple refrigerant lines are provided, the automatic address  
setup completes with power-ON of the outdoor unit.The operation of the remote controller is not accepted while  
automatic address works. (Approx. 4 to 5 minutes)  
Setup of line address of outdoor unit,  
indoor unit address, and group address  
Completion of cabling work  
NO  
Do you arbitrarily set the  
indoor unit address?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
(MANUAL)  
Is refrigerant line 1 line?  
YES  
Is group control performed?  
YES  
(To AUTO address mode)  
Do you change setting after  
automatic setting at the first time?  
YES  
Connect one remote controller with  
one indoor unit (1 : 1) tentatively with  
communication cable.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
After completion of address  
setup, change is to arbitral  
address/group manually.  
Setup of automatic  
address finishes within  
4 to 5 minutes.  
(
)
Set to all indoor units one by one.  
(
)
END  
• When the following addresses are not stored in the neutral memory (IC503) on the indoor P.C. board, a test  
run operation cannot be performed. (Unfixed data at shipment from factory)  
Item code Data at shipment  
Setup data range  
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0064 (No. 64 unit)  
Line address  
12  
13  
0099  
0099  
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0064 (No. 64 unit)  
Max. value of indoor units in the identical refrigerant line  
Indoor unit address  
0000 : Individual (Indoor units which are not controlled in a group)  
0001 : Master unit (1 indoor unit in group control)  
Group address  
14  
0099  
0002 : Sub unit (Indoor units other than master unit in group control)  
– 89 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2. Address Setup & Group Control  
<Terminology>  
Indoor unit No. : N - n = Outdoor unit line address N (Max. 30) - Indoor unit address n (Max. 64)  
Group address : 0 = Single (Not group control)  
1 = Master unit in group control  
2 = Sub unit in group control  
Master unit (= 1) : The representative of multiple indoor units in group operation sends/receives signals to/from  
the remote controllers and sub indoor units.  
(* It has no relation with an indoor unit which communicates serially with the outdoor units.)  
The operation mode and setup temperature range are displayed on the remote controller LCD.  
(Except air direction adjustment of louver)  
Sub unit (= 2)  
: Indoor units other than master unit in group operation  
Basically, sub units do not send/receive signals to/from the remote controllers.  
(Except errors and response to demand of service data)  
Header unit (Representative unit) (Master Twin)  
: This unit communicates with the indoor unit (follower) which serial-communicates with the  
outdoor units and sends/receives signal (Command from compressor) to/from the outdoor  
units as the representative of the cycle control in the indoor units of the identical line address  
within the minimum unit which configures one of the refrigerating cycles of Twin.  
Follower unit (Subordinate unit) (Sub Twin)  
: Indoor units excluding the header unit in Twin  
This unit communicates with (Header) indoor unit in the identical line address and performs  
control synchronized with (Header) indoor unit.  
This unit does not perform the signal send/receive operation with the outdoor units. :  
No judgment for serial signal error.  
10-2-1. System Configuration  
1. Single  
2. Twin  
Outdoor  
Indoor  
1-1  
Individual  
1-1  
1-2  
Sub/Follower  
(Master/Header)  
Master/Header  
Remote  
controller  
3. Single group operation  
2-1  
Sub/Header  
1-1  
Sub/Header  
4-1  
3-1  
Sub/Header  
8-1  
Sub/Header  
Master/Header  
– 90 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2-2. Automatic Address Example from Unset Address (No miswiring)  
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)  
1) Single  
1-1  
Individual  
(Master/Sub)  
2) Group operation (Twin, Triple operation)  
(Multiple outdoor units = Miltiple indoor units only with serial communication)  
2-1  
Sub/Header  
1-1  
Sub/Header  
1-2  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
Sub/Follower  
Master/Header  
Sub/Follower  
Sub/Follower  
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)  
• Header unit: The header unit receives the indoor unit data (thermo status) of the follower  
(Without identical line address & indoor/outdoor serial) and then finally controls the  
outdoor compressor matching with its own thermo status.  
The header unit sends this command information to the follower unit.  
• Follower unit: The follower unit receives the indoor unit data from the header  
(With identical line address & indoor/outdoor serial) and then performs the thermo  
operation synchronized with the header unit.  
The follower unit sends own thermo ON/OFF demand to the header unit.  
(Example)  
No. 1-1 header unit sends/receives signal to/from No. 1-2 and No. 1-3 follower units.  
(It is not influenced by the line 2 or 3 address indoor unit.)  
– 91 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2-3. Automatic Address Example from Unset Address (No miswiring)  
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)  
1) Single  
2) Twin  
3) Triple  
(1-1)  
(1-2)  
(1-1)  
1-2  
(1-2)  
(1-3)  
1-1  
Individual  
1-2  
Master/Header  
1-1  
1-3  
1-1  
Sub/Follower  
Sub/Header  
Master/Follower  
Sub/Follower  
(Master/Header)  
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)  
2. Group operation  
(Multiple outdoor units = Multiple indoor units with serial communication only, without twin)  
2-1  
Sub/Header  
1-1  
Sub/Header  
3-1  
8-1  
Sub/Header  
Master/Header  
(Max. : 8 units)  
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)  
3. Multiple groups operation  
Single  
Twin  
Triple  
2-1  
Sub/Header  
1-1  
Sub/Header  
2-3  
3-1  
Sub/Header  
3-3  
1-2  
Sub/Follower  
Master/Follower  
Sub/Follower  
2-1  
1-1  
1-2  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
Change is necessary  
Manually change addresses of the multiple follower units simultaneously from the remote controller.  
– 92 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-3. Remote Controller Wiring  
• Strip off approx. 9 mm the wire to be connected.  
Simultaneous twin system  
• For single system, use non polarity, 2 core wire is  
used for wiring of the remote controller.  
(0.5 mm² to 2.0 mm² wires)  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wiring  
• For the synchronous twin, triple system, use  
2-conre shield wire (Vinyl cord for microphone 0.5  
to 2.0 mm²) to conform to the EMC standard.  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
wiring  
A
1
B
2
A
1
B
2
Wiring diagram  
Indoor side  
Indoor side  
3
3
3
Indoor/Outdoor  
connecting wires  
Terminal block for remote controller  
wiring of indoor unit  
Terminal block  
Indoor power  
inter-unit wiring  
1
2
A
B
A
B
Remote controller  
unit  
Outdoor side  
L1 L2 L3  
N
Remote controller wire  
(Procured locally)  
380-415 V 3N~, 50Hz  
380 V 3N~, 60Hz  
For details of wiring/installation of the remote  
controller, refer to the Installation Manual enclosed  
with the remote controller.  
Simultaneous triple and double twin system  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wiring  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wiring  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wiring  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
wiring  
A
1
B
2
A
1
B
2
A
1
B
2
A
B
2
Indoor side  
Indoor side  
Indoor side  
Indoor side  
3
3
3
3
1
3
Indoor/Outdoor  
connecting wires  
Indoor power  
inter-unit wiring  
Indoor power  
inter-unit wiring  
Indoor power  
inter-unit wiring  
1
2
Outdoor side  
L1 L2 L3  
N
380-415 V 3N~, 50Hz  
380 V 3N~, 60Hz  
Triple  
Double twin  
Use 2-core shield wire (MVVS 0.5 to 2.0 mm² or more) for the remote controller wiring in the simultaneous  
twin, simultaneous triple and simultaneous double twin systems to prevent noise problems.  
Be sure to connect both ends of the shield wire to earth leads.  
Connect earth wires for each indoor unit in the simultaneous twin, simultaneous triple and simultaneous  
double twin systems.  
– 93 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-4. Address Setup (Manual setting from remote controller)  
In case that addresses of the indoor units will be  
determined prior to piping work after cabling work  
(Example of 2-lines cabling)  
(Real line: Cabling, Broken line: Refrigerant pipe)  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
• Set an indoor unit per a remote controller.  
Turn on power supply.  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Indoor  
A B  
Indoor  
A B  
Indoor  
A B  
Indoor  
A B  
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
Line address 1  
Indoor unit address 1  
Group address 1  
A B  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
1
2
Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously  
Remote controller  
for 4 seconds or more.  
For the above example, perform setting by  
connecting singly the wired remote controller  
without remote controller inter-unit cable.  
(Line address)  
Using the temperature setup  
set 12 to the CODE No.  
/
buttons,  
Group address  
Individual : 0000  
Master unit : 0001  
In case of group control  
Sub unit  
: 0002  
3
4
5
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set the line address.  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
(Indoor unit address)  
Using the temperature setup  
/
buttons, set 13 to the CODE No.  
6
7
8
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set 1 to the line address.  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
(Group address)  
Using the temperature setup  
/
buttons, set 14 to the CODE No.  
9
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set 0000 to Individual, 0001 to Master unit, and 0002 to sub unit.  
SET  
10  
11  
Push  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
TEST  
button.  
Setup completes. (The status returns to the usual stop status.)  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
2, 5, 8  
3, 6, 9  
END 11  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
4, 7, 10  
1
<Operation procedure>  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 END  
– 94 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-5. Confirmation of Indoor Unit No. Position  
1. To know the indoor unit addresses though position of the indoor unit body is recognized  
• In case of individual operation (Wired remote controller : indoor unit = 1 : 1)  
(Follow to the procedure during operation)  
<Procedure>  
ON / OFF  
1
2
Push  
Push  
button if the unit stops.  
button.  
UNIT LOUVER  
Unit No. 1-1 is displayed on LCD.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
1
(It disappears after several seconds.)  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
Operation  
The displayed unit No. indicate line address and  
indoor unit address.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
(When other indoor units are connected to the  
identical remote controller (Group control unit), other  
unit numbers are also displayed every pushing  
UNIT LOUVER  
2
button.  
<Operation procedure>  
END  
1 2  
2. To know the position of indoor unit body by address  
To confirm the unit No. in the group control  
(Follow to the procedure during operation) (in this procedure, the indoor units in group control stop.)  
<Procedure>  
The indoor unit numbers in the group control are  
successively displayed, and fan, louver, and drain pump  
of the corresponding indoor unit are turned on.  
(Follow to the procedure during operation)  
VENT  
TEST  
1
Push  
4 seconds or more.  
and  
buttons simultaneously for  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
• Unit No.  
is displayed.  
1
3
• Fans and louvers of all the indoor units in the  
group control operate.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
UNIT LOUVER  
2
Every pushing  
button, the unit numbers  
in the group control are successively displayed.  
2
• The unit No. displayed at the first time indicates the  
master unit address.  
<Operation procedure>  
• Fan and louver of the selected indoor unit only  
operate.  
END  
1 2 3  
TEST  
3
Push  
button to finish the procedure.  
All the indoor units in the group control stop.  
– 95 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Maintenance/Check list>  
Aiming in environmental preservation, it is strictly recommended to clean and maintain the indoor/outdoor units  
of the operating air conditioning system regularly to secure effective operation of the air conditioner.  
It is also recommended to maintain the units once a year regularly when operating the air conditioner for a long  
time.  
Check periodically signs of rust or scratches, etc. on coating of the outdoor units.  
Repair the defective position or apply the rust resisting paint if necessary.  
If an indoor unit operates for approx. 8 hours or more per day, usually it is necessary to clean the indoor/outdoor  
units once three months at least.  
These cleaning and maintenance should be carried out by a qualified dealer.  
Although the customer has to pay the charge for the maintenance, the life of the unit can be prolonged.  
Failure to clean the indoor/outdoor units regularly will cause shortage of capacity, freezing, water leakage or  
trouble on the compressor.  
Object  
Part name  
Contents of check  
Contents of maintenance  
Indoor  
¡
Outdoor  
¡
Heat exchanger  
Fan motor  
• Blocking with dust, damage check  
• Audibility for sound  
• Clean it when blocking is found.  
• When abnormal sound is heard  
¡
¡
• Clean with water if dirty  
• Replace if any breakage  
Filter  
• Visual check for dirt and breakage  
¡
¡
¡
• Visual check for swing and balance  
• Replace fan when swinging or  
balance is remarkably poor.  
• Check adhesion of dust and external  
appearance.  
Fan  
¡
• If a large dust adheres, clean it with  
brush or water.  
Suction/  
Discharge grille  
• Repair or replace it if deformation or  
damage is found.  
• Visual check for dirt and scratch  
• Check blocking by dust and dirt of drain  
water.  
Drain pan  
• Clean drain pan, Inclination check  
• Cleaning/Coating with repair painting  
¡
¡
Face panel, Louver  
• Check dirt and scratch.  
• Check rust and pealing of insulator  
External appearance  
• Coating with repair painting  
¡
• Check pealing and floating of coating film  
– 96 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
11. INSTALLATION MANUAL  
1 ACCESSORY PARTS  
Please read this Installation Manual carefully before installing the Air Conditioner.  
• This Manual describes the installation method of the outdoor unit.  
Accessory Parts  
• For installation of the indoor unit, follow the Installation Manual attached to the indoor unit.  
Part name  
Installation manual  
Q’ty  
Shape  
Usage  
1
(Hand this directly to the customer.)  
ADOPTION OF NEW REFRIGERANT  
Drain nipple  
1
1
This Air Conditioner is a new type that has adopted a new refrigerant HFC (R410A) instead of the conven-  
tional refrigerant R22 in order to prevent destruction of the ozone layer.  
Waterproof rubber cap  
This equipment complies with IEC 61000-3-12 provided that the short-circuit power Ssc is greater than or  
equal to Ssc (1) at the interface point between the user’s supply and the public system.  
It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by consultation with the distribution  
network operator if necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a supply with a short-circuit power Ssc  
greater than or equal to Ssc (1).  
Protective bush  
1
1
For protecting wires (pipe cover)  
Guard material for passage part  
For protecting passage part (pipe cover)  
Ssc (1)  
For conforming to EMC standards  
(Used for power wire)  
Clamp filter  
1
Model  
Ssc (MVA)  
1.41  
RAV-SM2244AT8(Z)(ZG)-E  
RAV-SM2804AT8(Z)(ZG)-E  
Ø19.1 mm pipe  
1
1
For the pipe inside the outdoor unit  
For connecting the pipe  
1.72  
Joint (Ø19.1 – Ø25.4 mm)  
Joint (Ø25.4 – Ø28.6 mm)  
Elbow  
1
1
For connecting the pipe  
For connecting the pipe  
Contents  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ACCESSORY PARTS .................................................................................................. 2  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................ 3  
INSTALLATION OF NEW REFRIGERANT AIR CONDITIONER ................................ 4  
INSTALLATION CONDITIONS .................................................................................... 6  
REFRIGERANT PIPING ............................................................................................ 10  
AIR PURGING ........................................................................................................... 14  
ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................ 17  
EARTHING ................................................................................................................ 19  
FINISHING ................................................................................................................. 20  
INFORMATION  
The main pipe on the gas side of this outdoor unit has a diameter of Ø28.6 mm, but a Ø19.1 mm flare connection is used  
where the valve is connected. Be sure to use the Ø19.1 mm pipe and joint provided as accessories for the pipe connection.  
Before installing the unit, check that the unit has the correct model name to prevent the wrong unit from being installed in the  
wrong place.  
Before proceeding to weld the refrigerant pipe, be sure to pass nitrogen through the pipe.  
Before installing the indoor units, read the instructions in the installation manual provided with the indoor units.  
Before installing a branch pipe, read the instructions in the installation manual provided with the branch pipe kit.  
In the case of a simultaneous double twin system, use indoor unit with the same capacity for all four indoor units.  
Branch pipe kit  
RAV-SM2244 RBC-DTWP101E  
RAV-SM2804 RBC-DTWP101E  
Combination indoor unit  
SM56 u 4 units  
SM80 u 4 units  
10 TEST RUN ................................................................................................................. 20  
11 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE......................................................................................... 20  
12 AIR CONDITIONER OPERATING CONDITIONS ..................................................... 20  
13 FUNCTIONSTO BE IMPLEMENTED LOCALLY ...................................................... 21  
14 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................... 22  
15 APPENDIX................................................................................................................. 24  
P.C. board settings are required for some of the indoor units if they are to be used in a twin, triple or double twin system.  
Refer to the instructions in the installation manual of the branch pipe kit, and ensure that the settings are selected correctly.  
Combination with the indoor units  
Combination with the indoor units is possible only when units with the same type are combined. Combinations of units with  
different types cannot be used.  
2
EN  
EN  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
Install the refrigerant pipe securely during the installation work before operating the air conditioner.  
If the compressor is operated with the valve open and without the refrigerant pipe, the compressor sucks air and the  
refrigeration cycle is overpressurized, which may cause a burst or injury.  
When carrying out the pump-down work, shut down the compressor before disconnecting the refrigerant pipe.  
Disconnecting the refrigerant pipe with the service valve left open and with the compressor still operating will cause air, etc.  
to be sucked in, raising the pressure inside the refrigeration cycle to an abnormally high level, and possibly resulting in  
rupturing, injury, etc.  
2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
Ensure that all Local, National and International regulations are satisfied.  
Read these “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully before installation.  
The precautions described below include important items regarding safety.  
Observe them without fail.  
After the installation work, perform a trial operation to check for any problem.  
Follow the Owner’s Manual to explain to the customer how to use and maintain the unit.  
Ask the customer to keep the Installation Manual together with the Owner’s Manual.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Do not climb onto or place objects on top of the outdoor unit.  
You may fall or the objects may fall off of the outdoor unit and result in injury.  
Ask an authorized dealer or qualified installation professional to install/maintain the air conditioner.  
Perform installation work properly according to the Installation Manual.  
Inappropriate installation may result in water leakage, electric shock or fire.  
Wear heavy gloves during the installation work to avoid injury.  
Be sure to connect earth wire (grounding work).  
Incomplete grounding cause an electric shock.  
Do not connect ground wires to gas pipes, water pipes, lightning rods or ground wires for telephone wires.  
Turn off the main power supply switch or breaker before attempting any electrical work and maintenance.  
Make sure all power switches are off. Failure to do so may cause electric shock.  
Use an exclusive power circuit for the air conditioner. Use the rated voltage.  
To Disconnect the Appliance from the Main Power Supply  
This appliance must be connected to the main power supply by means of a switch with a contact separation of at least 3 mm.  
A 25 A installation fuse (all fuse types can be used) must be used for the power supply line of this conditioner.  
Connect the connecting wire correctly.  
If the connecting wire is incorrect, electric parts may be damaged.  
When moving the air conditioner for installation to another place, be very careful not to allow the specified  
refrigerant (R410A) to become mixed with any other gaseous body into the refrigeration cycle.  
If air or any other gas mixes with the refrigerant, the gas pressure in the refrigeration cycle will become abnormally high and  
it may result in the pipe bursting or personal injuries.  
3
INSTALLATION OF NEW REFRIGERANT AIR  
CONDITIONER  
Do not modify this unit by removing any of the safety guards or by by-passing any of the safety interlock switches.  
Do not touch the intake or aluminum fins of the outdoor unit.  
Doing so may result in injury.  
Tighten the flare nut with a torque wrench in the specified manner.  
CAUTION  
Excessive tightening of the flare nut may cause a crack in the flare nut after a long period, which may result in refrigerant  
leakage.  
New Refrigerant Air Conditioner Installation  
THIS AIR CONDITIONER ADOPTS THE NEW HFC REFRIGERANT (R410A) WHICH DOES NOT DESTROY OZONE  
LAYER.  
Install the air conditioner securely in a location where the base can sustain the weight of the unit adequately.  
Perform the specified installation work to guard against an earthquake.  
If the air conditioner is not installed appropriately, accidents may occur due to the unit falling.  
If refrigerant gas has leaked during the installation work, ventilate the room immediately.  
If the leaked refrigerant gas comes in contact with fire, noxious gas may be generated.  
After the installation work, confirm that refrigerant gas does not leak.  
R410A refrigerant is apt to be affected by impurities such as water, oxidizing membrane, and oils because the working pressure  
of R410A refrigerant is approx. 1.6 times as that of refrigerant R22. Accompanied with the adoption of the new refrigerant, the  
refrigerant oil has also been changed. Therefore, during installation work, be sure that water, dust, former refrigerant, or  
refrigerant oil does not enter the new type refrigerant R410A air conditioner cycle.  
To prevent mixing of refrigerant or refrigerant oil, the sizes of connecting sections of charging port on main unit and installation  
tools are different from those of the conventional refrigerant units. Accordingly, special tools are required for the new refrigerant  
(R410A) units. For connecting pipes, use new and clean piping materials with high pressure fittings made for R410A only, so  
that water and/or dust does not enter.  
If refrigerant gas leaks into the room and flows near a fire source, such as a cooking range, noxious gas may be generated.  
Electrical work must be performed by a qualified electrician in accordance with the Installation Manual. Make sure  
the air conditioner uses an exclusive power supply.  
An insufficient power supply capacity or inappropriate installation may cause fire.  
Use only the specified wiring during the unit installation. Ensure that all terminals are securely fixed, so preventing  
any external forces having a negative effect on the terminals.  
When the air conditioner cannot cool or heat a room well, contact the dealer from whom you purchased the air  
conditioner as refrigerant leakage is considered as the cause.  
In the case of repair that requires refill of refrigerant, ask service personnel about details of the repair.  
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner is harmless.  
Generally, the refrigerant does not leak. However, if the refrigerant leaks in a room and a heater or stove burner in the room  
catches fire, it may generate toxic gas.  
When you ask service personnel for repairing refrigerant leakage, confirm that the leakage portion has been completely  
repaired.  
Conform to the regulations of the local electric company when wiring the power supply.  
Inappropriate grounding may cause electric shock.  
Do not install the air conditioner in a location that may be subjected to a risk of exposure to a combustible gas.  
If a combustible gas leaks and becomes concentrated around the unit, a fire may occur.  
4
EN  
EN  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
Required Tools/Equipment and Precautions for Use  
Prepare the tools and equipment listed in the following table before starting the installation work.  
Newly prepared tools and equipment must be used exclusively.  
4
INSTALLATION CONDITIONS  
Earthing  
WARNING  
Before installation  
Be sure to prepare to the following items before installation.  
Legend  
: Prepared newly (Use for R410A only. Do not use for refrigerant R22 or R407C etc.)  
: Conventional tools/equipment are available  
Length of refrigerant pipe  
Length of refrigerant pipe  
Make sure that proper earthing is provided.  
Improper earthing may cause an electric shock. For details  
on how to check earthing, contact the dealer who installed  
the air conditioner or a professional installation company.  
Tools/equipment  
Gauge manifold  
Use  
How to use tools/equipment  
Prepared newly for R410A only  
Prepared newly for R410A only  
connected to indoor/  
outdoor unit  
Item  
Vacuuming/charging refrigerant  
and operation check  
Addition of refrigerant is  
unnecessary at the local site.  
Charging hose  
7.5 to 30 m  
*31 to 70 m  
Proper earthing can prevent charging of electricity on the  
outdoor unit surface due to the presence of a high  
frequency in the frequency converter (inverter) of the  
outdoor unit, as well as prevent electric shock. If the  
outdoor unit is not properly earthed, you may be exposed  
to an electric shock.  
Unusable (Use the refrigerant charging measure  
instead.)  
If the total length of the  
refrigerant pipe exceeds  
30 m, add refrigerant in the  
amount given in the “Adding  
additional refrigerant”.  
Charging cylinder  
Can not be used  
Gas leak detector  
Vacuum pump  
Gas leak check  
Vacuum drying  
Prepared newly  
Unusable  
Be sure to connect the earth wire (grounding work).  
Incomplete grounding can cause an electric shock.  
Do not connect ground wires to gas pipes, water pipes,  
lightning rods or ground wires for telephone wires.  
Vacuum pump with backflow  
prevention function  
Vacuum drying  
*
Do not connect a refrigerant pipe that is shorter than  
7.5 m.  
This may cause a malfunction of the compressor or other  
devices.  
R22 (Conventional tools)  
Flare tool  
Flare machining of pipes  
Bending pipes  
Usable if dimensions are adjusted.  
R22 (Conventional tools)  
Bender  
Test Run  
Airtight test  
Refrigerant recovery equipment  
Torque wrench  
Pipe cutter  
Refrigerant recovery  
Tightening flare nuts  
Cutting pipes  
For R410A only  
Turn on the leakage breaker at least 12 hours before starting  
a test run to protect the compressor during startup.  
1. Before starting an airtight test, further tighten the spindle  
valves on the gas and liquid sides.  
2. Pressurize the pipe with nitrogen gas charged from the  
service port to the design pressure (4.15 MPa) to  
conduct an airtight test.  
Exclusive for Ø12.7 mm and Ø19.1 mm  
R22 (Conventional tools)  
CAUTION  
Welding machine and nitrogen  
cylinder  
Incorrect installation work may result in a malfunction or  
complaints from customers.  
Welding pipes  
R22 (Conventional tools)  
R22 (Conventional tools)  
3. After the airtight test is completed, evacuate the nitrogen  
gas.  
Refrigerant charging measure  
Charging refrigerant  
Air purge  
To purge air, use a vacuum pump.  
Refrigerant Piping  
Do not use refrigerant charged in the outdoor unit to  
purge air. (The air purge refrigerant is not contained in  
the outdoor unit.)  
New refrigerant (R410A)  
When using the conventional piping  
Electrical wiring  
When using the conventional piping with no indication of applicable refrigerant types, be sure to use it with a wall thickness  
of 0.8 mm for Ø6.4 mm, Ø9.5 mm, and Ø12.7 mm, with a wall thickness of 1.0 mm for Ø15.9 mm, with a wall thickness of  
1.2 mm for Ø19.1 mm, and with a wall thickness of 1.0 mm for Ø28.6 mm (half hard). Do not use the conventional piping with  
a wall thickness less than these thicknesses due to insufficient pressure capacity.  
Be sure to fix the power wires and indoor/outdoor  
connecting wires with clamps so that they do not come  
into contact with the cabinet, etc.  
When using general copper pipes  
Use general copper pipes with a wall thickness of 0.8 mm for Ø6.4 mm, Ø9.5 mm, and Ø12.7 mm, with a wall thickness of  
1.0 mm for Ø15.9 mm, with a wall thickness of 1.2 mm for Ø19.1 mm, and with a wall thickness of 1.0 mm for Ø28.6 mm  
(half hard).  
Do not use any copper pipes with a wall thickness less than these thicknesses.  
Flare nuts and flare machining  
The flare nuts and flare machining are different from those for the conventional refrigerant.  
Use the flare nuts supplied with the air conditioner or those for R410A.  
Before performing flare machining, carefully read “REFRIGERANT PIPING”.  
6
EN  
EN  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
Obstacle in front  
Installation Location  
Necessary Space for Installation  
(Unit: mm)  
CAUTION  
Above unit is free  
1. Single unit installation  
WARNING  
1. Install the outdoor unit in a location where the discharge  
air is not blocked.  
2. When an outdoor unit is installed in a location that is  
always exposed to strong winds like a coast or on the  
high stories of a building, secure normal fan operation by  
using a duct or wind shield.  
3. When installing the outdoor unit in a location that is  
constantly exposed to strong winds such as on the upper  
stairs or rooftop of a building, apply the windproofing  
measures referred to in the following examples.  
1) Install the unit so that its discharge port faces the  
wall of the building.  
Obstacle at rear side  
Install the outdoor unit properly in a location that is  
durable enough to support the weight of the outdoor  
unit.  
Insufficient durability may cause the outdoor unit to fall,  
which may result in injury.  
Upper side is free  
1. Single unit installation  
This outdoor unit has a weight of about 135 kg. Pay special  
attention when installing the unit onto a wall surface.  
2. Serial installation of two or more units  
2. Obstacles on both right and left sides  
CAUTION  
Keep a distance 500 mm or more between the unit  
and wall surface.  
The height of the  
Do not install the outdoor unit in a location that is  
subject to combustible gas leaks.  
Accumulation of combustible gas around the outdoor unit  
may cause a fire.  
obstacle should be  
lower than the height of  
the outdoor unit.  
500 mm  
Obstacle also at the above unit  
150 or  
more  
250 or  
more  
1,000 or  
more  
Install the outdoor unit in a location that meets the  
following conditions after the customer’s consent is  
obtained.  
3. Serial installation of two or more units  
A well-ventilated location free from obstacles near the air  
inlets and air outlet  
A location that is not exposed to rain or direct sunlight  
A location that does not increase the operating noise or  
vibration of the outdoor unit  
2) Consider the wind direction during the operational  
season of the air conditioner, and install the unit so  
that the discharge port is set at a right angle relative  
to the wind direction.  
A location that does not produce any drainage problems  
from discharged water  
Obstacles in both front and rear of unit  
150 or  
more  
250 or  
more  
250 or  
more  
250 or  
more  
Open above and to the right and left of the unit.  
The height of an obstacle in both the front and rear of the  
unit, should be lower than the height of the outdoor unit.  
The height of the obstacle should be lower than the height  
of the outdoor unit.  
Do not install the outdoor unit in the following locations.  
A location with a saline atmosphere (coastal area) or one  
that is full of sulfide gas (hot-spring area) (Special  
maintenance is required.)  
A location subject to oil, vapor, oily smoke, or corrosive  
gases  
A location in which organic solvent is used  
A location where high-frequency equipment (including  
inverter equipment, private power generator, medical  
equipment, and communication equipment) is used  
(Installation in such a location may cause malfunction of  
the air conditioner, abnormal control or problems due to  
noise from such equipment.)  
A location in which the discharged air of the outdoor unit  
blows against the window of a neighboring house  
A location where the operating noise of the outdoor unit is  
transmitted  
Standard installation  
1. Single unit installation  
Obstacle also above unit  
Strong wind  
Strong wind  
150 or  
more  
When using an air conditioner under low outside  
temperature conditions (Outside temp:-5 °C or lower)  
in COOL mode, prepare a duct or wind shield so that it  
is not affected by the wind.  
2. Serial installation of two or more units  
<Example>  
When the outdoor unit is installed in an elevated position,  
be sure to secure its feet.  
A location in which drain water poses any problems.  
Wind shield  
250 or  
more  
200 or  
more  
Wind shield  
8
EN  
EN  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
Serial installation in front and rear  
NO GOOD  
5
REFRIGERANT PIPING  
Open above and to the right and left of the unit.  
The height of an obstacle in both the front and rear of the unit  
should be lower than the height of the outdoor unit.  
Do not support the  
outdoor unit only  
with the fixing leg.  
If only the end of the  
fixing leg is supported,  
it may deform.  
Knockout of Pipe Cover  
Optional Installation Parts  
(Locally procured)  
Standard installation  
Knockout procedure  
Foundation  
Parts name  
Q’ty  
Set the out margin of the anchor bolt to 15 mm or less.  
15 or less  
Refrigerant piping  
Liquid side: Ø12.7 mm  
Gas side: Ø19.1 mm (Approx. 800 mm)  
A
One each  
1,000 or  
more  
300 or  
more  
1,500 or  
more  
2,000 or  
more  
200 or  
more  
Ø28.6 mm  
Pipe insulating material  
(polyethylene foam, 10 mm thick)  
B
1
When water is to be drained through the drain hose,  
attach the following drain nipple and waterproof rubber  
cap, and use the drain hose (Inner diam: 16 mm) sold on  
the market. Also seal the knockout hole and screws  
securely with silicone material, etc., to prevent water from  
leaking.  
C
Putty, PVC tape  
One each  
Installation of Outdoor Unit  
Before installation, check the strength and horizontalness  
of the base so that abnormal sounds do not emanate.  
According to the following base diagram, fix the base  
firmly with the anchor bolts.  
REQUIREMENT  
Rear direction  
Follow the instructions in the installation manual provided  
with the branch pipe kit and the instructions in the installation  
manual of the indoor unit to connect the refrigerant pipe  
between the branch pipe and indoor unit.  
Some conditions may cause dewing or dripping of water.  
When collectively draining discharged water completely,  
use a drain pan.  
Pipe cover  
(Anchor bolt, nut: M10 x 4 pairs)  
Side direction  
150  
600  
150  
Front direction  
Down direction  
430  
Drain hole  
The indoor/outdoor connecting pipes can be connected  
in 4 directions.  
Waterproof rubber cap  
Refrigerant Piping Connection  
(1 pc.)  
Knockout  
hole  
Drain nipple  
Take off the knockout part of the pipe cover through  
which pipes or wires will pass through the base plate.  
Detach the pipe cover and tap on the knockout section a  
few times with the shank of a screwdriver. A knockout  
hole can easily be punched.  
As shown in the figure below, it is easier to punch out the  
knockout hole when the pipe cover is left in place rather  
than when the cover is removed from the unit.  
In knocking out the hole, the knockout section can easily  
be removed by hand once the bottom of the three  
locations where the section is joined along the guide lines  
is broken using a screwdriver.  
After punching out the knockout hole, remove burrs from  
the hole, and install the protective bush and guard  
material around the passage hole provided as  
accessories in order to protect the wires and pipes. Also  
be sure to attach the pipe covers after connecting the  
pipes. The pipe covers can be easily attached by cutting  
off the slits at the lower part of the covers.  
CAUTION  
Please pay attention to the drain in region with snowfall  
and cold temperature, as it may be frozen and cause  
drainage problems. Punch the knockout holes on the  
base plate to improve drainability. Use a screwdriver and  
take off the knockout part outward.  
TAKE NOTE OF THESE 4 IMPORTANT POINTS BELOW  
FOR PIPING WORK  
1. Keep dust and moisture away from inside the connecting  
pipes.  
2. Tightly connect the connection between pipes and the  
unit.  
3. Evacuate the air in the connecting pipes using a  
VACUUM PUMP.  
Drain nipple mounting hole  
As shown in the figure below, install the foundation and  
vibration-proof rubber pads to directly support the bottom  
surface of the fixing leg that is in contact with and  
underneath the bottom plate of the outdoor unit.  
When installing the foundation for an outdoor unit with  
downward piping, consider the piping work.  
*
4. Check for gas leaks at connection points.  
GOOD  
Absorb vibration  
with vibration-proof  
rubber pads  
Piping connection  
Liquid side  
Knockout hole  
Waterproof rubber cap  
Drain nipple  
Fixing leg  
Outer diameter  
Thickness  
Foundation  
Ø12.7 mm  
0.8 mm  
GOOD  
Gas side  
Outer diameter  
Ø19.1 mm  
Thickness  
1.2 mm  
For Reference  
Bottom plate of  
outdoor unit  
If a heating operation is to be continuously performed for a  
long time under the condition that the outdoor temperature is  
0 °C or lower, draining defrosted water may be difficult due to  
the bottom plate freezing, resulting in trouble with the cabinet  
or fan.  
It is recommended to procure an anti-freeze heater locally in  
order to safely install the air conditioner.  
For details, contact the dealer.  
Ø28.6 mm  
1.0 mm (half hard)  
Foundation  
Support the bottom surface of the  
fixing leg that is in contact with and  
underneath the bottom plate of the  
outdoor unit.  
REQUIREMENT  
*
Be sure to wear heavy work gloves while working.  
On the gas side, be sure to use the Ø19.1 mm pipe provided  
with the outdoor unit.  
10  
EN  
EN  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Flaring  
Digital Inverter  
After the installation work, be sure to check for gas leaks  
of the pipe connections with nitrogen.  
Pressure of R410A is higher than that of R22 (Approx.  
1.6 times).  
Therefore, using a torque wrench, tighten the flare pipe  
connecting sections that connect the indoor/outdoor units  
at the specified tightening torque.  
Incomplete connections may cause not only a gas leak,  
but also trouble with the refrigeration cycle.  
Connecting the Gas Side Pipe  
Tightening of Connecting Part  
1. Cut the pipe with a pipe cutter.  
1. Align the centers of the connecting pipes and fully tighten  
the flare nut with your fingers. Then fix the nut with a  
wrench as shown in the figure and tighten it with a torque  
wrench.  
Be sure to remove burrs that may cause a gas leak.  
2. Insert a flare nut into the pipe, and then flare the pipe.  
Use the flare nuts supplied with the air conditioner or  
those for R410A.  
Insert a flare nut into the pipe, and flare the pipe.  
As the flaring sizes of R410A differ from those of  
refrigerant R22, the flare tools newly manufactured for  
R410A are recommended.  
REQUIREMENT  
Be sure to use the Ø19.1 mm pipe and joint provided as  
accessories of the outdoor unit to connect the gas side  
Ø19.1 mm pipe and Ø28.6 mm pipe.  
Half union or packed valve  
Flare nut  
When leading out the pipes toward the front, to one of the  
sides or toward the rear, use the Ø19.1 mm pipe and  
elbow provided as accessories of the outdoor unit, and  
adjust the bending direction. Cut the Ø19.1 mm pipe to  
the required length before using it.  
Do not apply refrigerant oil to the flared surface.  
Externally  
threaded side  
Internally threaded  
side  
However, the conventional tools can be used by  
adjusting the projection margin of the copper pipe.  
Fix with wrench.  
Tighten with torque wrench.  
Branch Pipe  
Carry out the refrigerant piping work using the branch pipe kit  
which is purchased separately.  
Projection margin in flaring: B (Unit: mm)  
2. As shown in the figure, be sure to use two wrenches to  
loosen or tighten the flare nut of the valve on the gas  
side. If you use a single crescent, the flare nut cannot be  
tightened to the required tightening torque.  
On the other hand, use a single crescent to loosen or  
tighten the flare nut of the valve on the liquid side.  
1. Align the provided Ø19.1 mm pipe with the pipe lead-out  
direction, and shape it so that its end comes out from the  
outdoor unit.  
2. On the outside of the outdoor unit, use the provided  
joints, and braze the Ø19.1 mm pipe and Ø28.6 mm pipe.  
B
Branch pipe installation  
The ends of the branch pipes  
form a line perpendicular to  
the ground.  
The ends of the branch  
pipes form a line  
perpendicular to the ground.  
Rigid (Clutch type)  
(Unit: N•m)  
Conventionaltool  
Outer dia. of copper pipe  
9.5 mm (diam.)  
Tightening torque  
33 to 42 (3.3 to 4.2 kgf•m)  
50 to 62 (5.0 to 6.2 kgf•m)  
68 to 82 (6.8 to 8.2 kgf•m)  
100 to 120 (10.0 to 12 kgf•m)  
Both the collecting  
pipe and branch  
pipes form a line  
R410A tool used  
R410A  
Outer diam. of  
copper pipe  
used  
Both the collecting  
pipe and branch  
pipes form a line  
parallel to the ground.  
12.7 mm (diam.)  
parallel to the ground.  
9.5  
15.9 mm (diam.)  
Joint (accessory)  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
1.0 to 1.5  
19.1 mm (diam.)  
0 to 0.5  
Joint  
(accessory)  
Branch pipe  
Cover  
Branch pipe  
Flaring diameter size: A (Unit: mm)  
Collecting pipe  
Gas side  
Ø19.1 mm pipe  
(accessory)  
Collection area  
Liquid side  
Cap  
A
Ø28.6 mm pipe  
(procured locally)  
Piping valve  
Tightened  
Loosened  
Inclined  
Make sure that the pipes are  
installed level after branching.  
NO GOOD  
Ø19.1 mm pipe  
: Brazing  
(accessory)  
+0  
Outer diam. of copper pipe  
A
–0.4  
Ø19.1 mm pipe  
Brazing  
9.5  
13.2  
16.6  
19.7  
24.0  
Flare nut  
(accessory)  
Length of straight sections on main pipe side of  
branch pipe  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
Valve at gas side  
Provide a straight section with a length of at least 500 mm on  
the main pipe side of the branch pipe. (Same for both liquid  
side and gas side)  
CAUTION  
Elbow (accessory)  
Ø19.1 mm pipe  
(accessory)  
1. Do not put the crescent wrench on the cap or cover.  
The valve may break.  
*
In case of flaring for R410A with the conventional flare  
tool, pull the tool out approx. 0.5 mm more than that for  
R22 to adjust it to the specified flare size.  
The copper pipe gauge is useful for adjusting the  
projection margin size.  
2. If applying excessive torque, the nut may break  
according to some installation conditions.  
REQUIREMENT  
Before proceeding to weld the refrigerant pipe, be sure to  
pass nitrogen through the pipe to prevent oxidation inside  
it. If nitrogen is not passed through the pipe, the  
refrigerating cycle may become clogged by oxidized  
scales.  
Cover  
500 mm  
or more  
500 mm  
or more  
The Ø28.6 mm pipe cannot be passed through the pipe  
cover and knockout hole in the base plate so be sure to  
connect the Ø19.1 mm pipe and Ø28.6 mm pipe outside  
the outdoor unit.  
NO GOOD  
Cap  
EN  
11  
12  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
Refrigerant Pipe Length  
6
AIR PURGING  
Simultaneous twin, triple  
Allowable pipe length (m)  
Branch piping Branch piping  
Height difference (m)  
Indoor-outdoor H  
Vacuum pump  
Airtight Test  
Total length  
Before starting an airtight test, further tighten the spindle  
valves on the gas side and liquid side.  
Pressurize the pipe with nitrogen gas charged from the  
service port to the design pressure (4.15 MPa) to conduct  
the airtight test.  
Outdoor  
unit  
1 +  
1 +  
1 +  
2
3
4
2
3
4
3 –  
4 –  
4 –  
2
2
3
As shown in the figure, connect the charge hose after the  
manifold valve is closed completely.  
Indoor-indoor  
Indoor unit:  
Upper  
Outdoor unit:  
Upper  
('h)  
L
Maximum  
Maximum  
Maximum  
Attach the connecting port of the charge hose with a  
projection to push the valve core (setting pin) to the charge  
port of the set.  
SM2244  
SM2804  
70  
70  
20  
20  
10  
10  
30  
30  
30  
30  
0.5  
0.5  
After the airtight test is completed, evacuate the nitrogen  
gas.  
Pipe diameter (mm)  
L
Outdoor  
unit  
Number of bent  
portions  
Main pipe  
Branch piping  
Air Purge  
With respect to the preservation of the terrestrial  
environment, adopt “Vacuum pump” to purge air (Evacuate  
air in the connecting pipes) when installing the unit.  
Open Handle Low fully.  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
L
SM2244  
SM2804  
Ø28.6  
Ø28.6  
Ø12.7  
Ø12.7  
Ø15.9  
Ø15.9  
Ø9.5  
Ø9.5  
10 or less  
10 or less  
Turn ON the vacuum pump. (*1)  
Do not discharge the refrigerant gas to the atmosphere to  
preserve the terrestrial environment.  
L
Figure of Simultaneous twin  
Figure of Simultaneous triple  
Loosen the flare nut of the packed valve (Gas side) a little to  
check that the air passes through. (*2)  
Indoor Unit  
Use a vacuum pump to discharge the air (nitrogen, etc.)  
that remains in the set. If air remains, the capacity may  
decrease.  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
L
For the vacuum pump, be sure to use one with a backflow  
preventer so that the oil in the pump does not backflow into  
the pipe of the air conditioner when the pump stops.  
(If oil in the vacuum pump is put in an air conditioner  
including R410A, it may cause trouble with the refrigeration  
cycle.)  
Retighten the flare nut.  
4
Outdoor Unit  
Outdoor Unit  
L
2
3
Execute vacuuming until the compound pressure gauge  
indicates –101 kPa (–76 cmHg). (*1)  
2
3
1
1
L
Compound pressure gauge  
Close Handle Low completely.  
Pressure gauge  
L
Simultaneous double twin  
Total length  
–101 kPa  
(–76 cmHg)  
Gauge manifold valve  
Turn OFF the vacuum pump.  
Allowable pipe length (m)  
Height difference (m)  
Indoor-outdoor H  
Handle Low  
L
Branch piping  
Handle High  
(Keep fully closed)  
Branch  
piping  
Branch  
piping  
• ( 4 + 2) – ( 5 + 2)  
• ( 4 + 2) – ( 6 + 3)  
• ( 4 + 2) – ( 7 + 3)  
• ( 5 + 2) – ( 6 + 3)  
• ( 5 + 2) – ( 7 + 3)  
• ( 6 + 3) – ( 7 + 3)  
Maximum  
Leave the vacuum pump as it is for 1 or 2 minutes, and  
check that the indicator of the compound pressure gauge  
does not return.  
Charge hose  
(For R410A only)  
1 + 2 +  
1 + 2 +  
1 + 3 +  
1 + 3 +  
4
5
6
7
Outdoor  
unit  
Charge hose  
(For R410A only)  
4
5
6
7
4 +  
5 +  
6 +  
7 +  
2
2
3
3
Indoor-  
indoor  
('h)  
Indoor  
unit:  
Upper  
Outdoor  
unit:  
Upper  
Vacuum pump adapter  
for counter-flow  
prevention  
L
Open the valve stem or valve handle fully. (First, at liquid  
side, then gas side)  
Maximum  
Maximum  
Maximum  
(For R410A only)  
Vacuum  
pump  
L
SM2244  
SM2804  
70  
70  
15  
15  
20  
20  
6
6
30  
30  
30  
30  
0.5  
0.5  
Charge port  
(Valve core (Setting pin))  
Disconnect the charge hose from the charge port.  
L
Pipe diameter (mm)  
Outdoor  
unit  
Number of bent  
portions  
Tighten the valve and caps of the charge port securely.  
Main pipe  
Branch piping  
Packed valve at gas side  
Gas side  
Ø28.6  
Liquid side  
Ø12.7  
Gas side  
2, 3: Ø15.9  
4, 5, 6, 7: Ø12.7 4, 5, 6, 7: Ø6.4  
Liquid side  
*1  
Use the vacuum pump, vacuum pump adapter, and gauge  
manifold correctly referring to the manuals supplied with each  
tool before using them.  
Check that the vacuum pump oil is filled up to the specified line  
of the oil gauge.  
When air is not charged, check again whether the connecting  
2, 3: Ø9.5  
SM2244  
SM2804  
10 or less  
10 or less  
Ø28.6  
Ø12.7  
2 to 7: Ø15.9  
2 to 7: Ø9.5  
*2  
Figure of Simultaneous double twin  
port of the discharge hose, which has a projection to push the  
valve core, is firmly connected to the charge port.  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Outdoor Unit  
4
5
6
7
2
3
1
EN  
13  
14  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
Adding additional refrigerant  
Figure of Simultaneous twin  
How to Open the Valve  
Open or close the valve.  
Insulating the Pipes  
The temperatures at both the liquid side and gas side will  
be low during cooling so in order to prevent  
condensation, be sure to insulate the pipes at both of  
these sides.  
Figure of Simultaneous triple  
Indoor Unit  
Liquid side  
Open the valve with a 4 mm hexagon wrench.  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Insulate the pipes separately for the liquid side and gas  
side.  
Gas side  
4
Outdoor Unit  
Outdoor Unit  
Insulate the branch pipes by following the instructions in  
the installation manual provided with the branch pipe kit.  
Use the insulating material provided as an accessory to  
insulate the Ø19.1 mm pipe at the gas side.  
Seal the area where the Ø19.1 mm pipe and Ø22.2 to  
Ø28.6 mm pipe are connected so that no gaps are left.  
Valve unit  
2
3
2
3
1
1
REQUIREMENT  
Using a minus screwdriver,  
Figure of Simultaneous double twin  
turn it counterclockwise by  
90° until it hits the stopper.  
(Full open)  
Indoor Unit  
Be sure to use an insulating material which can withstand  
temperatures above 120°C for the gas side pipe since this  
pipe will become very hot during heating operations.  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Indoor Unit  
Charge port  
Outdoor Unit  
4
5
6
7
Flare nut  
Replenishing Refrigerant  
2
3
This model is a 30 m chargeless type that does not need to  
have its refrigerant replenished for refrigerant pipes up to  
30 m. When a refrigerant pipe longer than 30 m is used, add  
the specified amount of refrigerant.  
1
Handle position  
Closed completely  
Opened fully  
Formula for calculating the amount of additional refrigerant  
(Formula will differ depending on the diameter of the liquid connecting side pipe.)  
Stopper pin  
Refrigerant replenishing procedure  
*
1 to 7 are the lengths of the pipes shown in the figures above (unit: m).  
1. After vacuuming the refrigerant pipe, close the valves  
and then charge the refrigerant while the air conditioner  
is not working.  
2. When the refrigerant cannot be charged to the specified  
amount, charge the required amount of refrigerant from  
the charge port of the valve on the gas side during  
cooling.  
Simultaneous twin  
Amount of additional  
refrigerant per meter  
(g/m)  
Diameter of connecting pipe  
(liquid side)  
Amount of additional refrigerant (g) =  
Amount of refrigerant added for main pipe +  
amount of refrigerant added for branch piping  
Movable part of valve (Stem)  
Main stopper  
1
2
3
D
E
While the valve is fully opened, after the screwdriver has  
reached the stopper, do not apply torque exceeding  
5 N•m. Applying excessive torque may damage the  
valve.  
Ø12.7  
Ø9.5  
Ø9.5  
80  
40  
D u ( 1 – 28) + Eꢀu ( 2 + 3 – 4)  
Requirement for replenishing refrigerant  
Simultaneous triple  
Diameter of connecting pipe (liquid side)  
Replenish liquid refrigerant.  
When gaseous refrigerant is replenished, the refrigerant  
composition varies, which disables normal operation.  
Amount of additional  
refrigerant per meter  
(g/m)  
Amount of additional refrigerant (g) =  
Amount of refrigerant added for main pipe +  
amount of refrigerant added for branch  
piping  
Valve handling precautions  
Open the valve stem until it strikes the stopper.  
It is unnecessary to apply further force.  
Securely tighten the cap with a torque wrench.  
1
2
3
4
D
E
Ø12.7  
Ø9.5  
Ø9.5  
Ø9.5  
80  
40  
D u ( 1 – 28) + Eꢀu ( 2 + 3 + 4 – 6)  
Cap tightening torque  
Ø12.7 mm  
Ø19.1 mm  
50 to 62 N•m  
(5.0 to 6.2 kgf•m)  
Simultaneous double twin  
Diameter of connecting pipe  
(liquid side)  
Amount of additional  
refrigerant per meter (g/m)  
Amount of additional refrigerant (g) =  
Amount of refrigerant added for main pipe  
+ amount of refrigerant added for first  
branch piping + amount of refrigerant  
added for second branch piping  
Valve size  
20 to 25 N•m  
(2.0 to 2.5 kgf•m)  
Outdoor  
unit  
14 to 18 N•m  
(1.4 to 1.8 kgf•m)  
1
2,  
3
4 to  
7
D
E
J
Charge port  
D u ( 1 – 28) + Eꢀu ( 2 + 3 – 4) +  
SM2244  
SM2804  
Ø12.7  
Ø12.7  
Ø9.5  
Ø9.5  
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
80  
80  
40  
40  
20  
40  
Jꢀu ( 4 + 5 + 6 + 7)  
D u ( 1 – 28) + Eꢀu ( 2 + 3 – 4) +  
Jꢀu ( 4 + 5 + 6 + 7)  
16  
EN  
EN  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
How to wire  
Wiring diagram  
7
ELECTRICAL WORK  
1. Connect the connecting wire to the terminal as identified  
with their respective numbers on the terminal block of the  
indoor and outdoor units.  
*
For details on the remote controller wiring/installation,  
refer to the Installation Manual enclosed with the remote  
controller.  
When the outdoor air temperature drops, power is  
supplied to the compressor with the purpose of  
preheating the compressor in order to protect it.  
Therefore, leave the main power switch at the “on”  
setting during the periods when the air conditioner is  
being used.  
H07 RN-F or 60245 IEC 66 (1.5 mm2 or more)  
2. When connecting the connecting wire to the outdoor unit  
terminal, prevent water from coming into the outdoor unit.  
3. Secure the power supply wire and indoor/outdoor  
connecting wires using the cord clamp of the outdoor  
unit.  
WARNING  
Simultaneous twin system  
1. Using the specified wires, ensure that the wires are  
connected, and fix wires securely so that the external  
tension to the wires does not affect the connecting  
part of the terminals.  
Incomplete connection or fixation may cause a fire, etc.  
2. Be sure to connect the earth wire (grounding work).  
Incomplete grounding may lead to electric shock.  
Do not connect ground wires to gas pipes, water pipes,  
lightning rods or ground wires for telephone wires.  
3. The appliance shall be installed in accordance with  
national wiring regulations.  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wiring  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
wiring  
4. For interconnecting wires, do not use a wire joined to  
another on the way.  
Wiring between Indoor Unit and  
Indoor side  
A
1
B
2
A
B
2
Indoor  
Use wires long enough to cover the entire length.  
5. Wiring connections differ in conformance to EMC  
standards, depending whether the system is twin,  
triple or double twin. Connect wires according to  
respective instructions.  
Outdoor Unit  
side  
3
3
1
3
1. Figure below shows the wiring connections between the  
standard indoor and outdoor units and between the  
indoor units and remote controller. The wires indicated by  
the broken lines or dot-and-dash lines are provided at the  
installation place.  
2. Refer to the wiring diagrams of the models concerned for  
the internal wiring connections of the outdoor unit and  
indoor units.  
Indoor/Outdoor  
connecting wires  
Indoor power  
inter-unit wiring  
1
2
Outdoor side  
Capacity shortages of the power circuit or an incomplete  
installation may cause an electric shock or fire.  
L1 L2 L3  
N
CAUTION  
380-415 V 3N~, 50Hz  
380 V 3N~, 60Hz  
An installation fuse must be used for the power supply  
line of this air conditioner.  
Incorrect/incomplete wiring may lead to an electrical fire  
or smoke.  
CAUTION  
3. There is no need to perform the P.C. board settings for  
the indoor units.  
Wrong wiring may cause a burn-out of some electrical  
parts.  
Input power  
380-415 V 3N~, 50Hz  
380 V 3N~, 60Hz  
Prepare an exclusive power supply for the air conditioner.  
This product can be connected to the mains power.  
Fixed wire connections:  
Be sure to use the cord clamps attached to the product.  
Do not damage or scratch the conductive core or inner  
insulator of the power and inter-connecting wires when  
peeling them.  
L1  
L2  
A switch that disconnects all poles and has a contact  
separation of at least 3 mm must be incorporated in the  
fixed wiring.  
L3  
Ν
Outdoor unit  
Use the power and Inter-connecting wires with specified  
thicknesses, specified types and protective devices  
required.  
1
1
2
2
3
3
Leakage  
breaker  
Simultaneous triple and double twin system  
1
2
3
1
2
3
Remove the panel, and you can see electric parts on the  
front side.  
A metal pipe can be installed through the hole for wiring.  
If the hole size does not fit the wiring pipe to be used, drill  
the hole again to an appropriate size.  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wiring  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wiring  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wiring  
Indoor unit  
(main)  
Indoor unit  
(secondary)  
Indoor unit  
(secondary)  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
wiring  
A
B
A
B
A
B
Furthermore, be sure to secure these wires with the pipe  
valve fixing plate and cord clamps stored in the electric parts  
box.  
A
1
B
2
A
1
B
2
A
1
B
2
A
1
B
2
Indoor side  
Indoor side  
Indoor side  
Indoor side  
Remote  
controller  
3
3
3
3
3
Indoor/Outdoor  
connecting wires  
Side D (Space: 8.5 mm)  
Side C (Space: 4 mm)  
Indoor power  
inter-unit wiring  
Indoor power  
Indoor power  
inter-unit wiring  
1
2
inter-unit wiring  
Power and Wiring Specifications  
Outdoor side  
L1 L2 L3  
N
Model  
(RAV-SM Type)  
224AT8 280AT8 224AT7 280AT7  
Secure the indoor/outdoor connecting wires at side C.  
Electric parts box  
380-415 V 3N~, 50Hz  
380 V 3N~, 60Hz  
380-415 V 3N~  
50 Hz  
380 V 3N~  
60 Hz  
Triple  
Power supply  
Maximum  
running current  
18.0 A  
25 A  
22.0 A  
18.0 A  
22.0 A  
25 A  
Double twin  
Installation  
fuse rating  
25 A  
25 A  
*
*
Use 2-core shield wire (MVVS 0.5 to 2.0 mm2 or more) for the remote controller wiring in the simultaneous twin,  
simultaneous triple and simultaneous double twin systems to prevent noise problems. Be sure to connect both ends of the  
Cord clamp  
Pipe hole  
5 u 2.5 mm2 or more  
shield wire to earth leads.  
Power wire*  
(H07 RN-F or 60245 IEC 66)  
Connect earth wires for each indoor unit in the simultaneous twin, simultaneous triple and simultaneous double twin  
systems.  
Indoor/outdoor  
connecting  
wires*  
4 u 1.5 mm2 or more  
(H07 RN-F or 60245 IEC 66)  
*
Number of wire u wire size  
Pipe valve fixing plate  
Panel  
EN  
17  
18  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
Stripping length power cord and connecting wire  
9
FINISHING  
Indoor/outdoor  
connecting wire  
Power supply wire  
L1 L2 L3 scNrew  
10  
1
2
3
10  
L1 L2 L3  
N
10  
10  
After the refrigerant pipe, inter-unit wires, and drain pipe have been connected, cover them with finishing tape and clamp them  
to the wall with off-the-shelf support brackets or their equivalent.  
1
2
3
Earth  
screwEarth  
Keep the power wires and indoor/outdoor connecting wires off the valve on the gas side or pipes that have no heat insulator.  
50  
50  
30  
40  
(mm)  
Earth line  
Earth line  
10 TEST RUN  
Connecting wire  
Power supply wire  
Cord clamp  
Cord clamp  
Turn on the leakage breaker at least 12 hours before starting a test run to protect the compressor during startup.  
To protect the compressor, power is supplied from the 380-415 VAC input to the unit to preheat the compressor.  
Check the following before starting a test run:  
Clamp filter  
(accessory)  
That all pipes are connected securely without leaks.  
That the valve is open.  
Cord clamp  
Cord clamp  
If the compressor is operated with the valve closed, the outdoor unit will become overpressurized, which may damage the  
compressor or other components.  
If there is a leak at a connection, air can be sucked in and the internal pressure further increases, which may cause a burst  
or injury.  
Operate the air conditioner in the correct procedure as specified in the Owner’s Manual.  
WARNING  
Be sure to attach the provided clamp filter to the power  
supply wire in order to conform to EMC standards.  
11 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE  
For an air conditioning system that is operated on a regular basis, cleaning and maintenance of the indoor/outdoor units are  
strongly recommended.  
As a general rule, if an indoor unit is operated for about 8 hours daily, the indoor/outdoor units will need to be cleaned at  
least once every 3 months. This cleaning and maintenance should be carried out by a qualified service person.  
Failure to clean the indoor/outdoor units regularly will result in poor performance, icing, water leaking and even compressor  
failure.  
8
EARTHING  
WARNING  
12 AIR CONDITIONER OPERATING CONDITIONS  
Be sure to connect the earth wire. (grounding work)  
Incomplete grounding may cause an electric shock.  
For proper performance, operate the air conditioner under the following temperature conditions:  
Cooling operation  
Heating operation  
Dry valve temp.  
Wet valve temp.  
–15°C to 46°C  
–20°C to 15°C  
Connect the earth line properly following applicable technical standards.  
Connecting the earth line is essential to preventing electric shock and to reducing noise and electrical charges on the outdoor  
unit surface due to the high-frequency wave generated by the frequency converter (inverter) in the outdoor unit.  
If you touch the charged outdoor unit without an earth line, you may experience an electric shock.  
If air conditioner is used outside of the above conditions, safety protection may work.  
20  
EN  
EN  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
14 TROUBLESHOOTING  
13 FUNCTIONS TO BE IMPLEMENTED LOCALLY  
You can perform fault diagnosis of the outdoor unit with the LEDs on the P.C. board of the outdoor unit in addition to using the  
check codes displayed on the wired remote controller of the indoor unit.  
Use the LEDs and check codes for various checks. Details of the check codes displayed on the wired remote controller of the  
indoor unit are described in the Installation Manual of the indoor unit.  
When using a Ø19.1 mm gas pipe for the existing piping,  
Handling Existing Pipe  
When using the existing pipe, carefully check for the  
following:  
set bit 3 of SW802 (switch for existing pipe) on the P.C.  
board of the outdoor unit to ON. In this case, the heating  
performance may be reduced depending on the outside  
air temperature and room temperature.  
Wall thickness (within the specified range)  
Scratches and dents  
Water, oil, dirt, or dust in the pipe  
Flare looseness and leakage from welds  
Deterioration of copper pipe and heat insulator  
Before recovering the refrigerant in the existing system,  
perform a cooling operation for at least 30 minutes.  
Verifying current abnormal status  
SW802  
1. Check that DIP switch SW803 is set to OFF.  
2. Jot down the states of LED800 to LED804. (Display mode 1)  
3. Press SW800 for at least 1 second. The LED status changes to display mode 2.  
4. Check the code whose display mode 1 equals the LED states jotted down and display mode 2 equals the current flashing  
status of LED800 to LED804 from the following table to identify the cause.  
When shipped from factory  
When using existing pipe  
Cautions for using existing pipe  
Verifying an abnormal state in the past although the abnormal state no longer occurs  
Do not reuse a flare nut to prevent gas leaks.  
Replace it with the supplied flare nut and then process it  
to a flare.  
Blow nitrogen gas or use an appropriate means to keep  
the inside of the pipe clean. If discolored oil or much  
residue is discharged, wash the pipe.  
Check welds, if any, on the pipe for gas leaks.  
There may be a problem with the pressure resistance of  
the branching pipes of the existing piping. Replace them  
with branch pipes (sold separately).  
1. Set bit 1 of DIP switch SW803 to ON.  
2. Jot down the states of LED800 to LED804. (Display mode 1)  
3. Press SW800 for at least 1 second. The LED status changes to display mode 2.  
4. Find an error whose display mode 1 equals the LED states jotted down and display mode 2 equals the current flashing  
states of LED800 to LED804 from the following table to identify the error.  
Recovering Refrigerant  
Use the refrigerant recovery equipment to recover the  
refrigerant.  
An outside air temperature (TO) sensor error can be checked only while it occurs.  
When the pipe corresponds to any of the following, do not  
use it. Install a new pipe instead.  
The pipe has been opened (disconnected from indoor  
unit or outdoor unit) for a long period.  
The pipe has been connected to an outdoor unit that  
does not use refrigerant R22, R410A or R407C.  
The existing pipe must have a wall thickness equal to or  
larger than the following thicknesses.  
Reference outside Wall thickness  
Material  
diameter (mm)  
(mm)  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.2  
1.0  
1.0  
6.4  
9.5  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
22.2  
28.6  
Half hard  
Half hard  
Do not use any pipe with a wall thickness less than these  
thicknesses due to insufficient pressure capacity.  
22  
EN  
EN  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
Digital Inverter  
15 APPENDIX  
Display mode 1  
Display mode 2  
No.  
Cause  
D800 D801 D802 D803 D804 D800 D801 D802 D803 D804  
6. When the existing air conditioner is removed after  
refrigerant has been recovered.  
Check if the oil is judged to be clearly different from  
normal oil.  
Work instructions  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Normal  
Discharge (TD) sensor error  
The existing R22 and R407C piping can be reused for our  
digital inverter R410A product installations.  
Heat exchanger (TE) sensor error  
Heat exchanger (TL) sensor error  
Outside air temperature (TO) sensor error  
Suction (TS) sensor error  
The refrigerator oil is copper rust green in color:  
There is the possibility that moisture has mixed with the  
oil and rust has been generated inside the pipe.  
There is discolored oil, a large quantity of residue, or a  
bad smell.  
WARNING  
Confirming the existence of scratches or dents on the  
existing pipes and confirming the reliability of the pipe  
strength are conventionally referred to the local site.  
Heat sink (TH) sensor error  
A large quantity of shiny metal dust or other wear  
residue can be seen in the refrigerant oil.  
Outdoor temperature sensor (TE/TS) connection error  
Outdoor EEPROM error  
7. When the air conditioner has a history of the compressor  
failing and being replaced.  
Basic conditions needed to reuse existing pipes  
10 Compressor lock  
When discolored oil, a large quantity of residue, shiny  
metal dust, or other wear residue or mixture of foreign  
matter is observed, trouble will occur.  
Check and observe the presence of three conditions in the  
refrigerant piping works.  
1. Dry (There is no moisture inside of the pipes.)  
2. Clean (There is no dust inside of the pipes.)  
3. Tight (There are no refrigerant leaks.)  
11 Compressor lock  
12 Current detection circuit error  
13 Thermostat for compressor activated  
14 Model data not set (on the service P.C. board)  
15 MCU-MCU communication error  
16 Discharge temperature error  
17 Abnormal power (open phase detected or abnormal voltage)  
18 Heat sink overheat  
8. When temporary installation and removal of the air  
conditioner are repeated such as when leased etc.  
9. If the type of refrigerator oil of the existing air conditioner  
is other than the following oil (Mineral oil), Suniso, Freol-  
S, MS (Synthetic oil), alkyl benzene (HAB, Barrel-freeze),  
ester series, PVE only of ether series.  
Restrictions for use of existing pipes  
In the following cases, the existing pipes should not be  
reused as they are. Clean the existing pipes or exchange  
them with new pipes.  
1. When a scratch or dent is heavy, be sure to use new  
pipes for the refrigerant piping works.  
2. When the existing pipe thickness is thinner than the  
specified “Pipe diameter and thickness,” be sure to use  
new pipes for the refrigerant piping works.  
The winding-insulation of the compressor may  
deteriorate.  
NOTE  
19 Gas leak detected  
20 4-way valve reverse error  
The above descriptions are results have been confirmed by  
our company and represent our views on our air  
conditioners, but do not guarantee the use of the existing  
pipes of air conditioners that have adopted R410A in other  
companies.  
21 High pressure release operation  
22 Outdoor fan motor error  
The operating pressure of R410A is high (1.6 times  
that of R22 and R407C). If there is a scratch or dent on  
the pipe or a thinner pipe is used, the pressure strength  
may be inadequate, which may cause the pipe to break  
in the worst case.  
23 Compressor driver short-circuit protection  
24 Position detection circuit error in one-line display  
25 Ps sensor error  
*
Pipe diameter and thickness (mm)  
Branching pipe for simultaneous operation system  
26 Ps drop down error  
Reference outside Wall thickness  
In the concurrent twin system, when TOSHIBA has  
specified that branching pipe is to be used, it can be  
reused.  
Material  
diameter (mm)  
(mm)  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.2  
1.0  
1.0  
(
: OFF : ON : Flashing)  
6.4  
9.5  
*
The LEDs and DIP switches are  
located on the lower left of the P.C.  
board of the outdoor unit.  
Branching pipe model name:  
ON  
ON  
1
RBC-TWP30E2, RBC-TWP50E2, RBC-TRP100E  
On the existing air conditioner for simultaneous operation  
system (twin, triple, double twin system), there are cases  
of branch pipes being used that have insufficient  
compressive strength.  
12.7  
15.9  
19.1  
22.2  
28.6  
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
Enlarged view of  
LEDs  
SW804  
SW805  
ON  
ON  
In such case, please change the piping to a branch pipe  
for R410A.  
Half hard  
Half hard  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
D805  
D804  
D803  
D802  
D801  
D800  
SW802  
SW803  
SW800 SW801 SW806  
LED  
Curing of pipes  
3. When the outdoor unit was left with the pipes  
disconnected, or the gas leaked from the pipes and the  
pipes were not repaired and refilled.  
When removing and opening the indoor or outdoor unit for a  
long time, cure the pipes as follows:  
D805  
D804  
D803  
D802  
D801  
D800  
Otherwise rust may be generated when moisture or  
foreign matter due to condensation enters the pipes.  
The rust cannot be removed by cleaning, and new pipes  
are necessary.  
There is the possibility of rain water or air, including  
moisture, entering the pipe.  
4. When refrigerant cannot be recovered  
There is the possibility that a large quantity of dirty oil  
or moisture remains inside the pipes.  
Placement location  
Term  
Curing manner  
5. When a commercially available dryer is attached to the  
existing pipes  
1 month or more  
Less than 1 month  
Every time  
Pinching  
Outdoors  
Indoors  
There is the possibility that copper green rust has been  
generated.  
Pinching or taping  
EN  
23  
24  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inverter  
YES  
NO  
Are there scratches or dents on the existing pipes?  
Existing pipes: Cannot be used.  
• Use new pipes.  
NO  
Is it possible to operate the existing air conditioner?  
YES  
• After the existing air conditioner is operated in cooling  
mode for approx. 30 minutes or longer,* recover the  
refrigerant.  
• For cleaning the pipes and recovering oil  
• Refrigerant recovery: Refrigerant recovery equipment  
Nitrogen gas pressure 0.5 MPa  
• Remove the existing air conditioner from the piping and  
carry out flushing (nitrogen pressure 0.5 MPa) to remove  
any remains inside of the pipe.  
Note]  
In case of twin pipes, also be sure to flush the  
branching pipe.  
(If there is discharge of remains, it is judged that a  
large quantity of remains are present.)  
Was largely discolored oil or a large quantity  
of remains discharged? (When the oil  
deteriorates, the color of the oil changes to a  
muddy or black color.)  
YES  
Clean the pipes or use new pipes.  
NO  
Connect the indoor/outdoor units to the existing pipe.  
• Use a flare nut attached to the main unit for the  
indoor/outdoor units. (Do not use the flare nut of the  
existing pipe.)  
• Re-machine the flare machining size to size for R410A.  
Piping necessary to change the flare nut/  
machining size due to pipe compression  
When using a Ø19.1 mm pipe for the gas pipe of the first  
branching pipe  
1) Flare nut width: H  
Copper pipe  
(mm)  
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.1  
Turn the existing pipe switch on the cycle control P.C.  
board of the outdoor unit to ON side. At shipment from  
factory OFF ON for existing pipe (Refer to the table  
below.) (Be sure to set the contents in the table below  
in order to restrict the refrigerating cycle pressure of  
the equipment in the pipe standard.)  
outer  
Ø6.4  
17  
Ø9.5  
22  
diameter  
H
26  
24  
29  
27  
36  
For R410A  
For R22  
Same as  
above  
Same as above  
Existing pipe SW  
Switch  
2) Flare machining size: A  
Copper pipe  
(mm)  
Bit 3 of SW802  
ON  
A
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.1  
outer  
diameter  
9.1  
9.0  
13.2  
13.0  
16.6  
16.2  
19.7  
19.4  
24.0  
23.3  
For R410A  
For R22  
• (Airtight test), Vacuum dry, Refrigerant charge, Gas leak  
check  
Becomes a little larger for R410A  
Do not apply refrigerator oil to the flare surface.  
Trial run  
EN  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. REPLACEMENT OFTHE SERVICE P.C. BOARD (4316V392) MCC-1599  
1. Setting the jumper wires and DIP switches  
Part name  
J800 to J803 Model switching  
J804 to J811 Settings  
Function  
Setting  
Cut these jumper wires according to the following table.  
Jumper wire  
DIP switch  
Set these jumper wires to the settings of the P.C. board  
before replacement  
Set SW802 to the setting of the P.C. board  
before replacement  
SW802  
Settings  
SW803  
SW804  
SW805  
LED indication switching  
Set SW803 to all OFF.  
Special operations for service Set SW804 to all OFF  
Special operations for service Set SW805 to all OFF  
Model switching (J800 to J803)  
Since this service P.C. board is available for several models, cut the jumper wires according to the following table.  
If they are not cut correctly, an error code “L10” or “L29” appears on the remote controller and the operation of  
the air conditioner is disabled.  
Model name  
Factory setting (default)  
J 800 J 801 J 802 J 803  
¡
×
¡
¡
×
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
RAV-SM2244AT8-E  
RAV-SM2804AT8-E  
¡
: Characters that indicate the following  
No. character : Standard models  
: Connected,  
: Cut  
¡
×
Z
: For salt-affected areas  
ZG  
: For heavily salt-affected areas  
MCC-1599  
SW805  
SW803  
SW804  
SW802  
J804 to J806  
J807 to J811  
J800 to J803  
– 110 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. HOWTO EXCHANGE COMPRESSOR  
13-1. Exchanging Procedure of Compressor (Outline)  
START  
NO  
Open PMV forcedly and then recover refrigerant  
using a refrigerant recovery unit.  
Has refrigerant recovery work been done?  
YES  
Turn off the leakage breaker.  
Never recover the refrigerant to the outdoor unit.  
For the refrigerant recovery work during reinstallation  
of repair work, be sure to use the refrigerant recovery unit.  
Remove the defective compressor.  
Mount a service compressor.  
Leakage check  
Recovery of refrigerant to the outdoor unit is unavailable;  
otherwise a serious accident such as explosion or  
injury may be caused.  
Vacuuming  
Charge the refrigerant.  
END  
13-2. Exchange of Compressor  
For exchange of compressors, refer to (11) Compressor in Section 14. Detachments.  
– 111 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. DETACHMENTS  
14-1. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM224, RAV-SM280 series  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Common  
procedure  
1
WARNING  
Service panel  
Stop operation of the air conditioner and turn off  
breaker switch.  
CAUTION  
Ensure wearing of gloves when performing any work  
in order to avoid injury from parts, etc.  
1. Detachment  
1) Remove the service panel.  
(Hexagonal screws Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs.)  
• Remove the screws and then pull service panel  
downward to remove.  
2) Remove the power supply cable and the indoor/  
outdoor connecting wire from the cord clamp and  
the terminal.  
3) Remove the top plate.  
(Hexagonal screws Ø4 × 10, 6 pcs.)  
2. Attachment  
1) Attach the top plate.  
Top plate  
(Hexagonal screws Ø4 × 10, 6 pcs.)  
2) Connect the power supply cable and the indoor/  
outdoor connecting wire to the terminal and then  
fix with the cord clamp.  
CAUTION  
The power supply cable and the indoor/outdoor  
connecting wire must be affixed along the crossover  
pipe using a commercially available bundling band so  
that they do not make contact with the compressor,  
gas valve, gas pipe and discharge pipe.  
3) Attach the front panel.  
(Hexagonal screws Ø4 ×10, 3 pcs.)  
Discharge  
port cabinet  
(upper)  
1. Detachment  
2
Setting moment  
1) Carry out the operation in 1. of  
above.  

Upper end plate  
of heat exchanger  
2) Remove screws for the discharge port cabinet and  
the inverter assembly. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
Discharge port  
cabinet (upper)  
3) Remove screws for the discharge port cabinet and  
the discharge cabinet.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove screw for the discharge cabinet and heat  
exchanger. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
5) Remove screw for the discharge port cabinet and  
the fin guard. (Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)  
2. Attachment  
1) Place upper left side of discharge cabinet on  
upper side of end board of heat exchanger and fix  
with a screw. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
Discharge  
port cabine  
Heat exchanger  
2) Mount other removed screws into original positions.  
– 112 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Discharge  
port cabinet  
1. Detachment  
3
Motor base  
1) Carry out the operation in 1. of  
above.  
and 1. of  

Heat exchanger  
Inverter assembly  
2) Remove the screws fixing the inverter assembly,  
the discharge port cabinet and the partition board.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 4 pcs.)  
3) Remove the screws for the discharge port cabinet  
and the bottom plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove screw for the discharge port cabinet and  
heat exchanger. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
5) Remove screw for the discharge port cabinet and  
the motor base. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
6) Remove screws for the discharge port cabinet  
and the fin guard.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
2. Attachment  
1) Place upper left side of discharge cabinet in cut  
on upper side of end board of heat exchanger and  
fix with a screw. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
Discharge  
port cabinet  
2) Mount other removed screws into original  
positions.  
Fin guard  
Bottom plate  
Cut in end plate  
of heat exchanger  
Discharge  
port cabinet  
– 113 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Side cabinet 1. Detachment  
Procedure  
Remarks  
4
1) Carry out the operation in 1. of  
above.  
and 1. of  
Side cabinet  
C Type screw  
(serration)  

2) Remove the screws fixing the inverter assembly  
and the side cabinet. (ST1T Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs.)  
3) Remove the screws for the side cabinet and the  
valve fixing plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove screw for the side cabinet and piping  
panel (rear). (Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)  
Holder fixing  
plate  
5) Remove screw for the side cabinet and the  
bottom plate. (Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)  
6) Remove screws for the side cabinet, heat  
exchanger and the fin guard.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 4 pcs.)  
7) Remove the screw of the holder fixing plate and  
the side cabinet (C type Ø4 × 8, 1 pc)  
Fin grad  
Heat  
exchanger  
2. Attachment  
Piping panel  
(rear)  
Bottom plate  
1) Temporarily suspend the side cabinet on the  
inverter assembly using the hook.  
2) Mount the removed screws in the opposite  
procedure to that during detachment.  
Inverter Ass’y  
Hook  
Valve fixing plate  
– 114 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Inverter  
assembly  
1. Detachment  
1) Carry out the operation in 1. of , 1. of  
5
Remove the fan motor lead wire  
from the cord clamp.  
and  

1. of  
above.  
Fan-IPDU board  
2) Remove the connectors connected to the fan motor  
relay board and the Fan IPDU board, the connector  
connected to other components from the control  
board  
Cut the  
banding band  
(Interface board).  
CN600: TS sensor (3P: White, tube: Gray)  
CN601: TE sensor (2P: White, tube: Blue)  
CN602: TO sensor (2P: Orange, tube: Black)  
CN603: TD sensor (3P: White, tube: Red)  
CN604: TL sensor (2P: White, tube: White)  
CN606: Presure sensor (4P: White)  
CN609: Case thermo. (2P: Blue)  
Discharge port  
cabinet  
Screws  
Interface  
board  
Fan motor  
relay board  
CN690: High poressure switch (3P: Green)  
CN700: 4-way coil (2P:Yellow)  
Water-proof sheet (rubber sheet)  
Sound-insulation board  
(upper)  
CN702: 2-way valve coil (3P: White)  
CN710: PMV coil 1 (6P: White)  
CN711: PMV coil 2 (6P: White)  
• Fan IPDU board  
CN750: Outdoors fan motor (3P: White)  
Cut the banding band and remove connector  
connected from fan motor to fan motor relay board.  
• Fan motor relay board  
CN08 : Outdoors fan motor (3P: White)  
Remove connectors after unlocking housing  
section  
Compressor lead  
3) Remove the screw (1 position) fixing the discharge  
port cabinet.  
4) Cut bundling band fixing various lead lines to  
inverter assembly.  
5) Remove water-proof sheet (rubber sheet) and  
sound-insulation plate (upper).  
Case thermmostat  
6) Remove terminal cover of compressor and remove  
compressor lead.  
Inverter assembly  
7) Pull up the inverter assembly at upper side to  
remove hook of partition plate (rear left part).  
Hook  
Hook sectio  
2. Attachment  
1) Mount the inverter assembly on the partition plate.  
Partition plate  
Inverter  
assembly  
CAUTION  
When mounting the inverter assembly on the  
partitioning plate, ensure proper mounting of the hook  
(rear left part) with partitioning plate.  
2) Mount the individual components in the opposite  
procedure to that during detachment.  
– 115 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Interface board  
(Control board)  
1. Detachment  
1) Carry out the operation in 1. of , 1. of  
6

MCC-1599  
and 1. of  
above.  
2) Remove lead wires and connectors to other  
components from the interface board  
(control board).  
CN603: TD sensor (3P: White, tube: Red)  
CN602: TO sensor (2P: Orange, tube: Black)  
CN601: TE sensor (2P: Green, tube: Blue)  
CN600: TS sensor (3P: White, tube: Gray)  
CN604: TL sensor (2P: White, tube: White)  
CN700: 4-way coil (2P:Yellow)  
CN710: PMV coil 1 (6P: White)  
CN711: PMV coil 2 (6P: White)  
CN702: 2-way coil (3P: White)  
CN606: Pressure sensor (4P: White)  
CN690: High pressure switch (3P: Green)  
CN802: Connection with Fan IPDU board  
(5P: white)  
Interface board (Control board)  
CN609: Case thermo.(2P :Blue)  
CN708: Magnet switch (2P: Blue)  
CN608: Connection with noise filter board  
(2P: White)  
CN01 : Indoor/Outdoor connection terminal  
(5P: White)  
CN02 : Power relay (3P: Red)  
Remove connectors after unlocking housing  
section  
3) Remove the claws of the supports  
(4 positions) fixing the board and remove the  
interface board (Control board).  
Support (4 positions)  
2. Attachment  
1) Mount the interface board (Control board).  
2) Mount the individual components in the  
opposite procedure to that during detachment.  
Statue of control board when removed  
– 116 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Fan-IPDU  
board  
1. Detachment  
1) Carry out the operation in 1. of , 1. of  
7
FAN-IPDU board  
and  

MCC-1597  
1. of  
above.  
2) Remove lead wires and connectors to other  
components from the Fan-IPDU board.  
CN700: Relay connector (3P, Blue)  
CN750: Outdoor fan motor (3P, White)  
CN500: Connection between reactor and  
noise filter board (7P, Red)  
CN502: Compressor IPDU board (3P, White)  
CN602: Noise filter board (2P, White)  
CN504: Interface board (5P, Blue)  
CN505: Compressor IPDU board (5P, Red)  
Connectors should be removed after unlocking  
the housing section.  
3) Remove screw fixing the earth wire.  
4) Remove the claw of the support (3 positions) fixing  
the board and the screw (5 positions) fixing the  
heat sink and then remove the Fan-IPDU board.  
Earth wire  
2. Attachment  
1) Mount Fan-IPDU board  
2) Mount components in the opposite method to that  
when removing.  
Screw (5 positions)  
Screw  
Support (3 positions)  
Heat sink  
State of Fan-IPDU board when removed  
– 117 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Noise filter  
board  
1. Detachment  
1) Perform the operation in 1. of , 1. of , 1. of  
8
Fan-IPDU board  
,

MCC-1600  
1.-2 of  
and 1.-2 of  
.
2) Remove the screws (4 positions) fixing the inverter  
assembly (front) to remove the lead wires from the  
upper left clamp. Then slide the inverter assembly  
(front) upwardly and remove.  
3) Remove the lead wires connector to other  
components from the noise filter board.  
CN05: Power supply terminal block (red)  
CN06: Power supply terminal block (White)  
CN07: Power supply terminal block (Black)  
CN24: Power supply terminal block (White)  
CN08: Power supply terminal block (Gray)  
CN09: Connection to earth (Brown)  
CN50: Interface board (2P, White)  
CN51: Fan-IPDU board (2P, Back)  
CN10: Posister (Red)  
Screws  
(2 positions)  
Interface board  
CN16: Relay (Red)  
CN17: Compressor IPDU board (White)  
CN18: Relay (Black)  
CN19: Relay (Gray)  
Remove  
all lead wire  
from the clamp  
CN23: Fan-IPDU board (5P, Red)  
Connectors should be removed after unlocking  
the housing section.  
Screws  
(2 positions)  
Screws  
(2 positions)  
4) Remove the claw of the support (2 positions) and  
the screw (2 positions) fixing the base and then  
remove the noise filter base.  
Inverter assembly  
(front)  
Noise filter board  
2. Attachment  
1) Mount noise filter board.  
2) Mount components in the opposite method to that  
when removing.  
Support  
(2 positions)  
Support  
(2 positions)  
Temporary Suspended State  
of Inverter Assembly (front)  
Using the hook,  
it is possible to temporarily suspend  
the inverter assembly (front).  
Using the hook  
State of noise filter board when removed  
– 118 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Compressor 1. Detachment  
Procedure  
Remarks  
9
IPDU board  
1) Carry out the operation in 1. of , 1. of  
,

MCC-1596  
1. of , 1. of , 1. of  
and 1. of  
.
ˆ
2) Pull the compressor lead from the space in the  
partition plate.  
3) Remove the screw (1 position) fixing the dis-  
charge port cabinet and the screws (4r positions)  
fixing the inverter assembly (IPDU) and then  
remove the lead wire from the top clamp.  
4) Slide and remove the inverter assembly (IPDU),  
rotate through 90 degrees and place the base  
facing the front surface.  
Inverterr asseembly  
(front)  
5) Remove the lead wire and connector to other  
components from the compressor IPDU board.  
CN01: Relay (Red)  
CN02: Noise filter board (White)  
CN03: Relay (Black)  
Screw  
CN04: Posister (Red)  
Compressor lead  
CN07: Power supply terminal block (Blue)  
CN08: Power supply terminal block (Blue)  
CN09: Power supply terminal block (Yellow)  
CN10: Power supply terminal block (Yellow)  
CN201: Compressor (Red)  
Rotate 90˚  
Inverter assembly  
(IPDU)  
Screw  
CN202: Compressor (White)  
CN203: Compressor (Black)  
CN851: FAN-IPDU board (5P, Red)  
CN101: FAN-IPDU board (3P, White)  
Connectors should be removed after unlocking  
the housing section.  
Discharge  
port cabbinet  
6) Remove the screws (4 positions) fixing the heat  
sink and the screws (3 positions) fixing the  
compressor IPDU board and then remove the  
compressor IPDU board.  
Screws  
2. Attachment  
1) Mount compressor IPDU board.  
Compressor  
IPDU board  
2) Mount components in the opposite method to that  
when removing.  
Screws  
Screw  
Screws  
Temporary suspended state  
of Inverter Assembly (IPDU)  
Screws  
Heat sink  
Using the hook,  
it is possible to temporarily suspend  
the inverter assembly (IPDU).  
Using the hook  
State of compressor IPDU board  
when removed  
– 119 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Fan motor  
Procedure  
Remarks  
1. Detachment  
1) Carry out the operation in 1. of  
10  
Flange nut  
Turn too right  
to loosen  
, 1. of  
and  

1. of  
above.  
ƒ
2) Remove the flange nut fixing the fan motor and the  
propeller fan.  
• The flange nut is loosened by turning to the right.  
(When tightening, turn it to the left)  
3) Remove the propeller fan.  
4) Remove the connector for the fan motor from the  
inverter.  
5) Remove the fan motor lead from the fan motor lead  
fixing rubber member of the through section of the  
partitioning board.  
6) Remove the fixing screws (4 pieces) while support-  
ing the fan motor so that it does not fall.  
Propeller fan  
2. Attachment  
1) Mount the fan motor.  
2) Mount the individual components in the opposite  
procedure to that during detachment  
Points to note when assembling fan motor  
• Tighten the flange nut with 4.9N•m (50kgf•cm).  
• Adjust length of the fan motor lead at the fan  
motor lead fixing rubber member so that the fan  
motor lead is not slack in order to avoid contact  
of the fan motor lead with the propeller fan.  
Fan motor  
Attach the motor lead fixing rubber member to  
the partition board so that the projection is on  
the refrigerating cycle side.  
• Ensure that the heat exchanger does not come  
into contact with the fan motor lead.  
CAUTION  
Ensure affixation of the fan motor lead to the motor  
base using a metal band of the motor base and a  
commercially available bundling band so that the fan  
motor lead does not come to contact with the  
propeller fan.  
Fan motor lead fixing rubber (upper)  
(mount so that the projection abuts with this side)  
Fan motor lead fixing rubber (lower)  
(mount so that the projection abuts with this side)  
Motorr base  
Metal  
band fixing  
Bundling  
band fixing  
Metal  
band fixing  
Bundling  
band fixing  
– 120 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Compressor 1. Detachment  
Procedure  
Remarks  
11  
Drip-proof sheet (rubber sheet)  
1) Recover the refrigerant gas.  
2) Carry out the operation in 1. of  
and  
above.  

3) Remove the piping panel (front).  
Remove the piping panel (front) and screws of the  
bottom plate. (Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
Remove screw of the piping panel (front) and the  
piping panel (rear).  
Sound-insulation  
plate  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)  
4) Remove the piping panel (rear).  
Remove the piping panel (rear) and screws of the  
bottom plate. (Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
5) Remove the drip-proof sheet. (Rubber sheet)  
Piping panel (front)  
Piping panel (rear)  
6) Remove the sound-insulation plate  
(upper, inner, outer).  
7) Remove the terminal cover of the compressor and  
then remove the compressor lead and the case  
thermostat.  
<Compressor terminal>  
Case thermostat  
CAUTION  
• Ensure that the removed wiring terminals are  
always insulated with insulation tape.  
• The only wiring removed is the wiring for  
performing exchange of the compressor.  
Black  
• The power lead connection section of the  
compressor is a round terminal connection.  
8) Remove the sensor pipe cover fixed to the  
discharge pipe.  
Power lead  
While  
Red  
9) Using a burner, remove the discharge pipe and  
the suction pipe connected to the compressor.  
Remove (suction pipe)  
Sensor pipe cover  
WARNING  
When removing the piping by broiling the welded part  
with a burner, ensure that there is no oil in the pipe in  
order to avoid the risk of fire with the melted wax.  
Remove  
(discharge pipe)  
10) Disengage the discharge pipe and the suction  
pipe of the refrigerating cycle upwardly.  
11) Remove the compressor nuts which fix the  
compressor to the bottom plate. (3 pcs.)  
12) Pull out the compressor toward you.  
Compressor bolt (3 pcs.)  
CAUTION  
As the weight of the compressor is 20kg or more, it  
should be handled by 2 workers.  
When there is no oil in the compressor, the mass of  
the compressor is 22 kg.  
– 121 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Compressor 2. Attachment  
Procedure  
Remarks  
11  
(continued)  
1) Mount the compressor by reversing the procedure for removal.  
CAUTION  
The fixing torque for the hexagonal bolts fixing the compressor is 19.6N•m (200kgf•cm).  
3. Vacuuming  
1) Connect the vacuum pump to the charge port and the high-pressure check joint of the liquid  
pipe and the gas pipe valve and then operate the vacuum pump.  
2) Carry out vacuuming until the vacuum low pressure gauge indicates 1 (mmHg).  
CAUTION  
Before vacuuming, open the pulse motor valve fully. If the pulse motor valve is closed,  
vacuuming may be impossible of the heat exchanger in the outdoor unit.  
Forcible fully-opened method for the pulse motor valve  
Turn on the breaker switch.  
• Short circuit CN300 on the interface board of the outdoor unit.  
Turn off the breaker switch.  
4. Refrigerant charge  
1) Add a refrigerant amount determined by the pipe length from the charge port of the valve.  
CAUTION  
The water-proof sheet (rubber sheet) should be mounted so that water drops from the  
accumulator or the pipes do not come into contact with the terminal section of the compressor.  
Pulse motor 1. Detachment  
12  
Accumulator  
PMV unit  
valve (PMV)  
coil  
1) Carry out work of item 1. of  
and  
above.  

2) Rotate the coil while pulling upwardly and then  
remove the coil from the pulse motor valve coil  
main unit.  
2. Attachment  
1) Surely match the positioning projection of the coil  
with the concave part of PMV main unit and then  
fix it.  
CAUTION  
Mount the coils or the coil carefully so that they do  
not make contact with the accumulator.  
PMV coil  
– 122 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Fan guard  
Procedure  
Remarks  
1. Detachment  
1) Carry out work of item 1. of  
13  
and 1. of  
above.  

ƒ
Remover screw  
(2 pcs.)  
CAUTION  
To prevent scratches to the product, carry out the  
work on cardboard, cloth, etc.  
2) Remove the discharge port cabinet and place the  
fan guard side facing upwards.  
Dischharge pport caabinet  
3) Remove the fixing screws for the fan guard.  
(Hexagonal screws Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove the discharge port cabinet and then put on  
it so that the fan guard side faces downward.  
5) Remove the screws fixing the bellmouth.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
Bellmouth  
6) Remove bellmouth.  
7) Press and remove hooking claw of fan guard with a  
flat screwdriver.  
Remove scrrew (2 pcs.)  
Bellmouth  
2. Attachment  
1) Press the projection on the upper side of the fan  
guard into the hole of the discharge cabinet and  
then push in the hooking claws.  
Fix the claws by using your hands to press the  
hooking claws (5 positions).  
Dischharge pport caabinet  
CAUTION  
Flat  
screwdriver Fan guard  
Check that all the hooking claws are fixed at the  
specified positions.  
2) After mounting, fix the fan guard with screws.  
(Hexagonal screws Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
3) Attach and mount the claws (3 positions) on the  
upper side of the bellmouth in the square hole of  
the discharge cabinet.  
Hooking claw  
4) After mounting, fix with a screw.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
Discharge port cabinet  
Square hole  
(3 positions)  
Bellmouth  
Claw (3 positions)  
– 123 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST  
15-1. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM2244AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E, RAV-SM2804AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E  
53  
8
42  
46  
4
25, 26, 27  
1
41  
44, 45  
16, 17  
22, 23, 24  
39  
13, 14  
11, 12  
60  
58, 59  
29  
28  
38  
2
3
30  
7
20, 21  
18  
19  
36, 37  
10, 49  
9, 48  
35  
15  
61  
47, 55, 56  
31  
32  
40  
43  
6
51  
50  
33, 34, 57  
5, 52  
– 124 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model name  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
RAV-SM2244  
RAV-SM2804  
AT8-E AT8Z-E AT8ZG-E AT8-E AT8Z-E AT8ZG-E  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
43120224 Fan, Proprller, PE492  
43122065 Bell Mouth  
43191651 Guard, Fan  
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43100323 Guard, Fin  
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal  
43151301 Switch, Pressure  
4312C037 Motor, Fan, ICF-280-A100-1  
4316V135 Bush  
43146680 Valve, Packed, 12.7  
43146725 Valve, Ball, SBV-JA6GTC-1  
43146700 Valve, 2-way, VPV-603D  
37546847 Coil, Solenoid, 2-way, AC220–240V  
43146722 Coil, Solenoid, STF-01AJ502E1  
43146698 Valve, 4-way, STF-0731G  
43146734 Valve, Check, ZGV-S55B-A  
43148208 Accumulator  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43148209 Accumulator  
43100345 Panel, Back, Piping  
43111337 Rubber  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43122095 Base Ass’y, Motor  
43122105 Base Ass’y, Motor  
4314G187 Condenser Ass’y, Lower  
4314G188 Condenser Ass’y, Lower  
4314G189 Condenser Ass’y, Lower  
4314G191 Condenser Ass’y, Up  
4314G192 Condenser Ass’y, Up  
4314G193 Condenser Ass’y, Up  
4301P703 Mark, TOSHIBA  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4301P729 Mark, Inverter  
43146676 Joint, Check  
43119390 Hanger  
43100347 Panel, Front, Piping  
43149318 Rubber, Supporter, Pipe, DIA 19.0  
43149320 Rubber, Supporter, Pipe, DIA 8.0  
43111334 Insulator, Sound, Up  
43111335 Insulator, Sound, In  
43111336 Insulator, Sound, Out  
43100329 Cabinet Ass’y, Out  
43100332 Cabinet Ass’y, Up  
43100335 Cabinet Ass’y, Front  
43100338 Panel Ass’y, Side  
43100341 Cabinet Ass’y, Top  
Sensor Ass’y, Low Pressure,  
43  
43150321  
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
NSK-BC010F-067  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
43197164 Nut, Flange  
43047669 Nut, Flange  
43196113 Bushing  
43149324 Rubber, Cushion  
43047692 Bonnet  
43147451 Bonnet, 3/4 IN  
43147649 Strainer  
4314Q008 Strainer  
43063317 Holder, Thermostat  
43019904 Holder, Sensor  
43197183 Bolt, Compressor, M6  
43197184 Bolt, Compressor, M6  
43149325 Band, Fix  
43119477 Plate, Fix, Condenser  
43119478 Plate, Fix, Condenser  
43046494 Coil, PMV Ass’y, UKV-A040  
4314Q004 Strainer  
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
– 125 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-2. Inverter Assembly  
RAV-SM2244AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E, RAV-SM2804AT8 (Z) (ZG) -E  
718, 719  
714  
702  
705  
704  
720  
717  
718, 719  
711  
709  
722  
716  
708  
721  
701  
710  
712  
703  
720  
709  
713  
720  
715  
(TE)  
(TS)  
(TO)  
(TD)  
(TL)  
706  
707  
– 126 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model name RAV-SM  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
2244AT8-E  
2804AT8-E  
2244AT8Z-E  
2804AT8Z-E  
2244AT8ZG-E  
2804AT8ZG-E  
701  
702  
703  
704  
705  
706  
707  
708  
709  
710  
711  
712  
713  
714  
715  
716  
717  
718  
719  
720  
721  
722  
43058288 Reactor, CH-56-4Z  
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
5
2
1
4
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
5
2
1
4
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
5
2
1
4
43154177 Relay, 480V, 20A (Contact)  
43158199 Reactor, CH-44-FCZ-2  
43158207 Reactor, CH-68  
43153006 PTC-Thermistor, ZPROYCE101A500  
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, Service, TC (F6)  
43150319 Sensor Ass’y, Service, TD (F4)  
43160565 Terminal Block, 3P, 20A, AC250V  
43160579 Terminal, 4P, 30A  
43060859 Fuse Block, 30A, 250V, FH153-PB  
4316V390 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1596, Comp-IPDU  
4316V391 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1597, Fan-IPDU  
4316V392 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1599, CDB  
4316V398 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1600, N/F  
43063325 Holder, Sensor, 6-6.35, 8  
4316V393 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1436  
43160590 Fuse, 6.3A, AC250V  
43282001 Bushing  
43183020 Collar  
43063248 Supporter Ass’y  
43060639 Fuse, 25A, 250V  
43163015 Supporter  
– 127 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-3. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM2244AT7 (Z) (ZG), RAV-SM2804AT7 (Z) (ZG)  
53  
8
42  
46  
4
25, 26, 27  
1
41  
44, 45  
16, 17  
22, 23, 24  
39  
13, 14  
11, 12  
60  
58, 59  
29  
28  
38  
2
3
30  
7
20, 21  
18  
19  
36, 37  
10, 49  
9, 48  
35  
15  
61  
47, 55, 56  
31  
32  
40  
43  
6
51  
50  
33, 34, 57  
5, 52  
– 128 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model name  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
RAV-SM2244  
RAV-SM2804  
AT7  
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AT7Z  
AT7ZG  
AT7  
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AT7Z  
AT7ZG  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
43120224 Fan, Proprller, PE492  
43122065 Bell Mouth  
43191651 Guard, Fan  
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43100323 Guard, Fin  
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal  
43151301 Switch, Pressure  
4312C037 Motor, Fan, ICF-280-A100-1  
4316V135 Bush  
43146680 Valve, Packed, 12.7  
43146725 Valve, Ball, SBV-JA6GTC-1  
43146700 Valve, 2-way, VPV-603D  
43146716 Coil, Solenoid, 2-way, AC220V, 60Hz  
43146706 Coil, Solenoid, VHV-01AJ502E1  
43146698 Valve, 4-way, STF-0731G  
43146734 Valve, Check, ZGV-S55B-A  
43148208 Accumulator  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
1
43148209 Accumulator  
43100345 Panel, Back, Piping  
43111337 Rubber  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43122095 Base Ass’y, Motor  
43122105 Base Ass’y, Motor  
4314G187 Condenser Ass’y, Lower  
4314G188 Condenser Ass’y, Lower  
4314G189 Condenser Ass’y, Lower  
4314G191 Condenser Ass’y, Up  
4314G192 Condenser Ass’y, Up  
4314G193 Condenser Ass’y, Up  
4301P703 Mark, TOSHIBA  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4301P729 Mark, Inverter  
43146676 Joint, Check  
43119390 Hanger  
43100347 Panel, Front, Piping  
43149318 Rubber, Supporter, Pipe, DIA 19.0  
43149320 Rubber, Supporter, Pipe, DIA 8.0  
43111334 Insulator, Sound, Up  
43111335 Insulator, Sound, In  
43111336 Insulator, Sound, Out  
43100329 Cabinet Ass’y, Out  
43100332 Cabinet Ass’y, Up  
43100335 Cabinet Ass’y, Front  
43100338 Panel Ass’y, Side  
43100341 Cabinet Ass’y. Top  
Sensor Ass’y, Low Pressure,  
43  
43150321  
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
NSK-BC010F-067  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
43197164 Nut, Flange  
43047669 Nut, Flange  
43196113 Bushing  
43149324 Rubber, Cushion  
43047692 Bonnet  
43147451 Bonnet, 3/4 IN  
43147649 Strainer  
4314Q008 Strainer  
43063317 Holder, Thermostat  
43019904 Holder, Sensor  
43197183 Bolt, Compressor, M6  
43197184 Bolt, Compressor, M6  
43149325 Band, Fix  
43119477 Plate, Fix, Condenser  
43119478 Plate, Fix, Condenser  
43046494 Coil, PMV Ass’y, UKV-A040  
4314Q004 Strainer  
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
– 129 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-4. Inverter Assembly  
RAV-SM2244AT7 (Z) (ZG), RAV-SM2804AT7 (Z) (ZG)  
718, 719  
714  
702  
705  
704  
720  
717  
718, 719  
711  
709  
722  
716  
708  
721  
701  
710  
703  
712  
720  
709  
713  
720  
715  
(TE)  
(TS)  
(TO)  
(TD)  
(TL)  
706  
707  
– 130 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model name RAV-SM  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
2244AT7  
2804AT7  
2244AT7Z  
2804AT7Z  
2244AT7ZG  
2804AT7ZG  
701  
702  
703  
704  
705  
706  
707  
708  
709  
710  
711  
712  
713  
714  
715  
716  
717  
718  
719  
720  
721  
722  
43058288 Reactor, CH-56-4Z  
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
5
2
1
4
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
5
2
1
4
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
5
2
1
4
43154177 Relay, 480V, 20A (Contact)  
43158199 Reactor, CH-44-FCZ-2  
43158207 Reactor, CH-68  
43153006 PTC-Thermistor, ZPROYCE101A500  
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, Service, TC (F6)  
43150319 Sensor Ass’y, Service, TD (F4)  
43160565 Terminal Block, 3P, 20A, AC250V  
43160579 Terminal, 4P, 30A  
43060859 Fuse Block, 30A, 250V, FH153-PB  
4316V390 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1596, Comp-IPDU  
4316V391 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1597, Fan-IPDU  
4316V392 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1599, CDB  
4316V398 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1600, N/F  
43063325 Holder, Sensor, 6-6.35, 8  
4316V393 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1436  
43160590 Fuse, 6.3A, AC250V  
43282001 Bushing  
43183020 Collar  
43063248 Supporter Ass’y  
43060639 Fuse, 25A, 250V  
43163015 Supporter  
– 131 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNINGS ON REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE  
Important  
Check of Concentration Limit  
The room in which the air conditioner is to be  
installed requires a design that in the event of  
refrigerant gas leaking out, its concentration will  
not exceed a set limit.  
NOTE 2 :  
The standards for minimum room volume are as follows.  
1) No partition (shaded portion)  
The refrigerant R410A which is used in the air  
conditioner is safe, without the toxicity or combustibility of  
ammonia, and is not restricted by laws to be imposed  
which protect the ozone layer. However, since it contains  
more than air, it poses the risk of suffocation if its  
concentration should rise excessively. Suffocation from  
leakage of R410A is almost non-existent. With the recent  
increase in the number of high concentration buildings,  
however, the installation of multi air conditioner systems  
is on the increase because of the need for effective use  
of floor space, individual control, energy conservation by  
curtailing heat and carrying power etc.  
Most importantly, the multi air conditioner system is able  
to replenish a large amount of refrigerant compared with  
conventional individual air conditioners. If a single unit of  
the multi conditioner system is to be installed in a small  
room, select a suitable model and installation procedure  
so that if the refrigerant accidentally leaks out, its  
concentration does not reach the limit (and in the event  
of an emergency, measures can be made before injury  
can occur).  
2) When there is an effective opening with the adjacent  
room for ventilation of leaking refrigerant gas (opening  
without a door, or an opening 0.15% or larger than the  
respective floor spaces at the top or bottom of the door).  
Outdoor unit  
Refrigerant piping  
Indoor unit  
3) If an indoor unit is installed in each partitioned room  
and the refrigerant piping is interconnected, the  
smallest room of course becomes the object.  
In a room where the concentration may exceed the limit,  
create an opening with adjacent rooms, or install  
mechanical ventilation combined with a gas leak  
detection device.  
But when a mechanical ventilation is installed  
interlocked with a gas leakage detector in the smallest  
room where the density limit is exceeded, the volume  
of the next smallest room becomes the object.  
The concentration is as given below.  
Total amount of refrigerant (kg)  
Min. volume of the indoor unit installed room (m³)  
Concentration limit (kg/m³)  
Refrigerant piping  
Outdoor unit  
The concentration limit of R410A which is used in multi  
air conditioners is 0.3kg/m³.  
Very  
small  
Indoor unit  
room  
Small  
room  
Medium  
room  
Large room  
Mechanical ventilation device - Gas leak detector  
NOTE 1 :  
If there are 2 or more refrigerating systems in a single  
refrigerating device, the amounts of refrigerant should be  
as charged in each independent device.  
NOTE 3 :  
The minimum indoor floor area compared with the  
amount of refrigerant is roughly as follows:  
(When the ceiling is 2.7m high)  
Outdoor unit  
e.g., charged  
e.g.,  
amount (10kg)  
charged amount (15kg)  
40  
Range below the  
35  
m²  
density limit  
of 0.3 kg/m³  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
(countermeasures  
not needed)  
Room A Room B Room C Room D Room E Room F  
Indoor unit  
Range above  
the density limit  
of 0.3 kg/m³  
(countermeasures  
needed)  
For the amount of charge in this example:  
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in  
rooms A, B and C is 10kg.  
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in  
rooms D, E and F is 15kg.  
0
10  
20  
30  
Total amount of refrigerant  
kg  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION  
23-17, TAKANAWA 3 CHOME, MINATOKU, TOKYO, 108-8580, JAPAN  
Copyright © 1999 to 2009 TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION, ALL Rights Reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tascam Microphone TM ST2 User Manual
Telex Headphones HD 3A User Manual
Tiffen Camera Accessories Digital Diffuson FX Filter User Manual
Toastmaster Popcorn Poppers TMPC4 User Manual
Toshiba CRT Television 27A41 User Manual
Tripp Lite Switch B072 016 1 IP User Manual
Ultimate Support Systems Switch AX 90B User Manual
VocoPro Stereo System AIR NET User Manual
Wasp Bar Code Printer WPL305 User Manual
Weed Eater Lawn Mower 438175 User Manual